Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / IP Group Plc

IP Group Plc

ipo · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker ipo
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · IP Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Evolving 
great ideas

into world-changing businesses

I

P

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

4

S

t

o

c

k

C

o

d

e

:

I

P

O

Annual Report and Accounts 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
Stock Code: IPO

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Welcome to IP Group

IP Group plc develops intellectual  
property-based businesses.

We are passionate about evolving great ideas into world-changing businesses 
and we achieve this by systematically helping to create, build and support 
outstanding intellectual property-based companies.

We provide our portfolio companies with financial capital from our balance sheet and also from funds that we manage on 
behalf of others. Our pioneering approach to supporting our portfolio companies differentiates us from traditional venture 
capital companies. Beyond financial capital provision, we support our portfolio companies with strategic and commercial 
expertise, executive search and development, corporate finance and capital raising, and a range of administrative services. 

We run the Company in a principled manner and we are committed to building a successful and sustainable  
business that will provide attractive returns over the long term for our shareholders and other stakeholders. 

Investor proposition/key strengths

A significant 
market 
opportunity

A strong  
balance  
sheet

 Read more on page 08 

 Read more on page 32 

Long-term 
partnerships 
create barriers 
to entry for 
competitors

 Read more on pages 03, 09 and 17 

A proven  
track record  
of sustained 
growth

A strong  
senior  
management 
team

Access to  
a wide range  
of capital 
funding

 Read more opposite 

 Read more on page 46 

 Read more on pages 11 and 17 

Getting around the report

For further information within  
this document

Additional information online at: 
www.ipgroupplc.com

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Highlights

Net Assets (£m)

£526.2m  (2013: £336.6m)

526.2

336.6

263.1

221.6

173.1

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Strategic Report Overview 

Positive progress against  
key strategic objectives

 ■ Net assets increased to £526.2m  

(2013: £336.6m)

What’s inside

Strategic Report

Overview 

Highlights 

Group at a Glance 

 ■ 70% increase in capital provided to portfolio 

Our Business & Strategy 

companies: £46.8m (2012: £27.5m)

 ■ Portfolio of 90 companies (2013: 72) 

 ■ £100m (before expenses) raised through 

Chairman’s letter 

Marketplace 

Business model 

issue of new equity capital in February 2014

Strategy 

 ■ Acquisition of Fusion IP plc completed and 
now fully integrated within the Group, 
bringing additional expertise and broader 
portfolio

 ■ Further expansion into the US; now 

engaged with Princeton, Pennsylvania and 
Columbia universities.

Our Performance 

Key performance indicators 

Operational review 

Portfolio review 

Financial review 

Risk management 

Building a sustainable business 

Our Governance

Overview 

Board of Directors 

Corporate Governance 

Committee Reports 

Directors’ Remuneration Report  

Report of the Audit Committee 

Share price performance

+21%   (2013: +42%)

Capital deployed into portfolio companies (£m)

£46.8m  (2013: £27.5m)

+21%

+42%

+53%

+157%

205.0p

30.5p

46.8

Other Statutory 

Directors’ report 

26.3

27.5

Our Financials

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities  81

Independent auditor’s report 

84 

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

14.3

6.9
2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Financial highlights 

Post-year-end highlights 

 ■ Significantly oversubscribed proposed firm 
placing, placing and open offer to raise 
gross proceeds of £128m to help fuel the 
next phase of the Group’s growth

 ■ Net assets excluding intangibles and the 
Oxford equity rights asset increased to 
£451.3m (2013: £315.5m)

 ■ Net cash and deposits as at 31 December 

2014: £97.3m (2013: £24.1m)

 ■ Adjusted profit before tax of £16.2m  

(2013: £77.6m), excluding £6.7m reduction 
in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset 
and amortisation of intangible assets  
(2013: £5.0m)

Group Primary Statements 

Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement of  
financial position 

Consolidated statement  
of cash flows 

Consolidated statement of  
changes in equity 

Group Notes

Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 

Company Statements 

Company balance sheet 

Notes to the Company  
financial statements 

Company information 

Disclaimer: This Annual Report and Accounts may contain forward-looking statements. These statements reflect the Board’s 
current view, are subject to a number of material risks and uncertainties and could change in the future. Factors that could cause or 
contribute to such changes include, but are not limited to, the general economic climate and market conditions, as well as specific 
factors relating to the financial or commercial prospects or performance of individual companies within the Group’s portfolio. Further 
details can be found in the Risk management section on pages 34 to 39.

Throughout this Annual Report and Accounts, the Group’s holdings in portfolio companies reflect the undiluted beneficial equity 
interest excluding debt, unless otherwise explicitly stated. 

01

02 

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

30

34

40

46

48

58

75

79

87

88

89

90

91

117

118

IBC

01

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comGroup at a Glance

Portfolio overview

IP Group’s portfolio

Sectors

Portfolio value (% of total)

£349.9m

Fair Value

Healthcare

 Read more on page 22

Technology

 Read more on page 24

Cleantech

 Read more on page 26

Biotech

£213.1m (61%)

£58.6m (17%)

£56.2m (16%)

£16.4m (5%)

 Read more on page 28

Multiple sectors

£5.6m (1%)

 Read more on the sector reporting changes on page 21 in the Portfolio review

90

Companies in total

Of which: Top ten worth

£255.1m

£77.9m other post-seed
= 42 companies

£16.9m early stage
= 38 companies

Most valuable:  
Oxford Nanopore

£128.3m

>£200m

Total funds raised by 
portfolio companies in 2014

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

02

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Strategic Report Overview 

2014 net fair
value change1

Incubation

Seed

Stage

Post-seed 
(private)

Post-seed 
(public)

Research partners

UK Partners

 ■ University of Bath

 ■ University of Bristol

 ■ University of Cardiff

 ■ University of Glasgow

 ■ University of Leeds

 ■ King’s College London

 ■ Queen Mary 

University of London

 ■ University of Manchester

 ■ University of Nottingham

 ■ University of Oxford

 ■ University of Sheffield

 ■ University of Southampton

 ■ University of Surrey

 ■ Swansea University 

 ■ University of York

US pilot agreements

 ■ Columbia University

 ■ University of Pennsylvania

 ■ Princeton University

£7.7m

£(0.8)m

£6.7m

£1.0m

£6.1m

5

5

1

2

–

7

7

7

3

1

14

7

5

6

1

5

6

5

2

1

Total

13

25

33

19

1.  Unrealised increase/(decrease) in value excluding investments and divestments in the period.

03

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comCreate

To build and maintain a pipeline of compelling  
intellectual property-based opportunities

23830.02   Design B   10-2-2015

Heading OneStrategic Report

Our Business & Strategy

Chairman’s letter 

Marketplace 

Business model 

Strategy 

Our Performance

Key performance indicators 

Operational review 

Portfolio review 

Financial review 

Risk management 

Building a sustainable business 

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

30

34

40

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Chairman’s letter

A busy year  
of fuelling growth

In my last statement as Chairman,  
I am pleased to report that 2014 has 
been a busy year for IP Group and 
March 2015’s £128m equity funding 
will help to fuel the next phase in 
the Group’s development. Since its 
admission to AIM in 2003, the year 
I first became Chairman, the Group 
has experienced significant growth, 
with a tenfold increase in its market 
capitalisation to over £1bn today.

Dr Bruce Smith  Chairman

IP Group’s mission is to evolve great ideas into world-changing 
businesses. Until 2013, the Group concentrated solely on 
opportunities in the UK. However, during that year, it established 
a presence in the US - a country that the Board believes offers 
a rich source of accessible world-class IP. The Group now has 
pilot commercialisation agreements with three US Ivy League 
universities and announced its first spin-out from the University 
of Pennsylvania in December. 

The Group’s UK operations have also seen significant 
developments during 2014. In March, the Group acquired 
Fusion IP plc, a complementary business in which the Group 
had held a strategic stake since 2009. The acquisition has 
created a Group with an enlarged specialised team and 
greater breadth of coverage, enabling deeper access to a 
pool of intellectual property while also allowing the Group to 
improve the service offering to existing and potential research 
institutions. Looking at the UK business overall, on balance I 
consider that the Group’s portfolio companies are progressing 
well and many have achieved significant milestones during 
the year. Of these, I particularly highlight Modern Biosciences’ 
collaboration with Johnson & Johnson Innovation Centre and 
Janssen Biotech, Inc. 

Financial performance
In 2014, although the macroeconomic environment improved 
in the UK and the US, and equity markets were generally 
positive, AIM, where approximately 40% of the Group’s 
portfolio companies by value are quoted, lost 17.5% of its value. 
When considered against this backdrop, the Group’s financial 
performance in 2014 was satisfactory although much lower than 
compared to 2013. Net assets, excluding intangibles and the 
Oxford Equity Rights asset, increased to £451.3m (2013: £315.5m) 
while the Group recorded an adjusted profit before tax of £16.2m 
excluding the £6.7m reduction in the value of the Oxford Equity 
Rights Asset and amortisation of intangible assets (2013: £77.6m 
profit; £5.0m reduction in the value of the Oxford Equity Rights 
Asset). Profit after tax was £9.5m (2013: £72.6m). As highlighted 
in my 2013 statement, shareholders should continue to consider 
IP Group as a long-term business and therefore profits and cash 
realisations will fluctuate from year to year.

Organisational structure 
The operational integration of Fusion IP plc has increased the 
Group’s size and depth of expertise. In order to support this and 
the Group’s continued growth, the two-tiered governance and 
management structure comprising the Group Board and the 
Executive Committee has been formalised. In order to further 
deepen the Group’s sectoral knowledge and capability, the core 
opportunity evaluation and business building team has now 
been formally divided into four specialist divisions – Biotech, 
Cleantech, Healthcare and Technology. The Board believes that 
this new Group structure allows the business to operate more 
effectively and to the benefit of the Group, and its partners and 
stakeholders as a whole.

2014: Year in Review

February 
Group completes 
£100m 
fundraising.
Actual 
Experience plc 
admitted to AIM.

March 
Acquisition of 
Fusion IP plc.
Xeros Technology 
Group plc IPO 
and admission 
to AIM.

April 
Pilot deal agreed 
with Princeton 
University.

January 
Oxford Nanopore 
Technologies Ltd 
MinION Access 
Programme 
oversubscribed.
Group extends 
agreement with 
University of 
Manchester.

y
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
&
s
s
e
n
i
s
u
B
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

06

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Business & Strategy

Board changes
As I announced in my 2013 statement, Professor Lynn Gladden 
joined the Board in 2014 and brings with her an impressive 
background in academia and industry. I was also pleased to 
welcome David Baynes and Doug Liversidge - who joined the 
Group from Fusion IP plc - to the Board as Chief Operating 
Officer and Non-executive Director respectively. David and Doug 
bring with them a wealth of knowledge and expertise and, along 
with Lynn, have already made a significant contribution to the 
Company. 

During the year, Charles Winward stepped down from the 
Group’s Board as an Executive Director to pursue other 
opportunities and Francis Carpenter stepped down as  
Non-executive Director of the Group following the completion 
of his second three-year term in office. It was announced in 
October that I would be stepping down as Non-executive 
Chairman and a director of the Company once a suitably 
qualified and experienced successor had been appointed. 
As announced today, after a rigorous process, the Board has 
approved the Nominations Committee’s recommendation to 
appoint Mike Humphrey as the Group’s Non-executive Chairman. 
Mike, currently the Group’s Senior Independent Director and 
Chair of its Remuneration Committee, will assume office with 
effect from the end of the Group’s Board meeting to be held 
on 24 March 2015. The Board considered Mike’s experience 
internationally and with institutional investors, and in leading 
and growing a major corporation built on innovation into the 
FTSE100, made him an exceptional candidate for the role. The 
role of Senior Independent Director will be assumed by Doug 
Liversidge and Jonathan Brooks will become Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee with effect from this same date. The 
Group intends to appoint a further Non-executive Director and 
will update shareholders to this end in due course.

Our stakeholders
The success of the Group relies on the hard work and dedication 
of many people and, over the twelve years I have served on the 
Board of IP Group, it has been my privilege to meet and work 
with so many talented teams. I would like to extend my sincere 
thanks to the Board, IP Group’s staff, its academic partners and 
the management teams of its portfolio companies for these 
efforts. I would also like to express my sincere gratitude to the 
Company’s shareholders and limited partners for their support 
over the years.

Building a sustainable business
Building a sustainable, viable business is fundamental to the 
Group’s future success and we continually strive to run our 
operations, and respond to issues, in a responsible manner with 
consideration for all our stakeholders’ needs. The Group is also 
committed to minimising the business’ environmental impact as 
well as having a positive influence on the communities where 
it operates. Major portfolio themes for IP Group have included, 
and will continue to include, business opportunities focused 
on developing clean technology, environmental improvement 
and resource efficiency. Sustainable and ethical practices are 
integrated into our business model and will continue to underpin 
how the Group operates and does business with its partners.

Since I joined the Board in 2002, and first became Chairman in 
2003 and again in 2007, the Group has undergone a period of 
rapid growth and transformation and I am very proud of what 
has been achieved by the team. Together we have created 
a business that today has a large specialised team, access to 
intellectual property from 15 of the UK’s, and three of the US’s, 
top research universities and a portfolio with a value of £350m 
and approximately £97m in cash. This is my last Chairman’s 
statement and I would like to wish IP Group’s Board, staff, 
partners and shareholders every success for the future.

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman
9 March 2015

June 
Diurnal Limited 
reports positive 
Phase 2 results.

July 
Ceres Power 
Holdings plc 
raises £20m.

August 
MedaPhor 
Group plc IPO 
and admission 
to AIM.
Oxford 
Nanopore 
Technologies 
Limited raises 
£35.0m.

Retroscreen 
Virology 
Group plc 
raises £33.6m.
Diurnal Limited 
raises £6m.

September 
Getech Group 
plc announces 
largest ever 
single new 
contract win 
worth $5m.

October 
Ceres Power 
signs joint 
development 
agreement 
with a leading 
Japanese 
power systems 
company.

November 
Modern 
Biosciences 
plc agrees 
deal worth 
up to £176m 
with Johnson 
& Johnson 
Innovation 
Centre.

December 
Group 
completes first 
spin-out from 
a US University 
(University of 
Pennsylvania).

Genomics 
Limited raises 
£10.3m.
Group enters 
initiative with 
US-based 
FedIMPACT.

07

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comMarketplace

IP Group continues to see a wealth 
of world-class commercialisation 
opportunities emanating from 
scientific research

Current economic climate
In 2014, recovery was uneven in the global economy and many 
countries experienced weak growth. Although there were 
encouraging signs of GDP growth in the first half of the year, 
the eurozone was under pressure by the close of 2014 and, at 
the beginning of 2015, the European Central Bank announced 
its intention to launch a quantitative easing programme in an 
attempt to stimulate the economy. 

The Government recognises the increasingly important role 
that business building and venture capital companies can 
play in supporting the incubation companies which emerge 
from university research. IP Group already seeks opportunities 
in the majority of the eight technologies and welcomes the 
Government’s approach, believing that central policy support is 
likely to improve the high-quality, innovative output emanating 
from the research institutions with which it has partnerships.

Outside the eurozone, the US and UK economies achieved solid 
growth in 2014. For 2015, although forecasts remain cautious, 
the UK is still currently expected to have the second fastest-
growing economy in the developed world behind the US. 

Global research landscape
The UK and the US are still recognised as being at the 
forefront of producing world-class scientific research and have 
been responsible for some of the most significant scientific 
breakthroughs in recent history. The most prestigious research 
institutions in both countries continue to attract outstanding 
researchers and innovators from around the world who wish 
to work with the best in their field. However, in recent years, 
research and development (“R&D”) has become a more 
important feature of economies in Asia, Africa and Latin America, 
who all plan to increase their expenditure in this area. In 2012, 
China invested 2.0%* of its GDP in R&D compared to 1.7%* in the 
UK and 2.8%* in the US. The outcome of this increased focus on 
R&D may, in the future, result in potential IP opportunities for the 
Group in other jurisdictions.

In its recent report “Our plan for growth: science and innovation”, 
the UK’s Department for Business, Innovation & Skills outlined 
its plans to maintain and advance the UK’s leading position in 
scientific research. The UK Government has committed £5.9bn 
to science capital up until 2021 and additionally maintains its 
focus on the “Eight Great Technologies” (see table on the right).  

The US Government continues to fund science and innovation 
and has highlighted advanced manufacturing, clean energy 
and innovation in life sciences, biology and neuroscience as 
some of its budget priorities for 2015 and 2016. Despite the US 
Government and universities’ commitment to supporting science 
and technology, venture capital investment companies in the 
US have, in recent years, increasingly focused on opportunities 
in IT and social media and therefore the Directors believe that 
this mismatch of funding creates an attractive opportunity for IP 
Group. IP Group currently has pilot arrangements with three Ivy 
League universities in the North East Corridor of the US. 

The UK Government’s  
Eight Great Technologies

 ■ Big data and energy efficient computing

 ■ Satellites and commercial applications of space

 ■ Robotics and autonomous systems

 ■ Synthetic biology

 ■ Regenerative medicine

 ■ Agri-science

 ■ Advanced materials and nano-technology

 ■ Energy and its storage

* Source: Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development, 2012.

Source: “Our plan for growth: science and innovation”, the UK Department for 
Business Innovation & Skills.

y
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
&
s
s
e
n
i
s
u
B
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

08

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Business & Strategy

Competitive landscape
The number of companies and organisations seeking to 
commercialise intellectual property, and/or provide capital to  
spin-out companies from universities and research intensive 
institutions in the UK has increased. Further, the Group faces the 
risk of competition in new geographies in which it seeks to operate, 
for example as a result of its recent expansion into the US. 

When approaching new opportunities, potential funders will often 
act in a collaborative manner through syndication of investment 
however, there are also occasions when IP Group may need 
to participate in a competitive process to obtain an interest in a 
particular technology. The Group’s portfolio companies regularly 
compete with a range of technology and other businesses when 
seeking capital for the development of their business models. This 
competition for both opportunities and capital can come from a 
wide variety of categories of entity, including:

 ■ specialist traditional venture capital investors;

 ■ large private institutional investors;

 ■ privately managed schemes based on government funding;

 ■ private individuals, both acting individually or collectively 

as groups such as business angel networks, crowdfunding 
platforms or through beneficial tax mechanisms such as SEIS, 
EIS and VCTs;

 ■ direct public funding, for example the EU level JEREMIE fund 

and other national and local schemes; and

 ■ universities and research intensive institutions seeking to raise 
private sector funding themselves to support their in-house 
technology commercialisation activities.

IP Group’s competitive advantage
IP Group’s approach to providing capital to early-stage businesses 
is one of the ways in which it differentiates itself from the more 
traditional venture funds, which have tended to support early-
stage businesses, already with a management team in place, 
through “fixed-life” funds. The Group also differentiates itself by 
actively supporting its portfolio companies through access to 
early-stage business-building expertise, interim executive support, 
technical and commercial networks and senior team recruitment 
and development. In addition, the Group provides operational, 
legal, business and company secretarial support to its companies, 
with a view to minimising the most common administrative 
factors that can contribute to early-stage company failure, as 
well as executive search assistance and ongoing, innovative 
programmes designed to help the companies’ senior executives 
to develop their management and communication skills and, as a 
result, improve company performance. 

09

IP Group’s  
key differentiators

 ■ Strength of partnerships with leading research 
institutions, giving access to potentially disruptive IP 
in both the UK and the US.

 ■ Business-building expertise including an executive 

search function and innovative programmes working 
with CEOs and boards of portfolio companies.

 ■ “Patient” capital approach.

Accessing quality research
While it is important to have a presence in the countries where 
leading research is produced, the Group considers it important to 
establish credible partnerships with the top research institutions 
in order to access research with commercial potential. Although 
the Company has increased its focus on the US in recent times, 
its core activities have primarily been conducted in the UK. 

In 2014, the Research Excellence Framework (“REF”) carried out 
a ranking assessment of the quality of research carried out in 
UK research institutions. Based on this assessment, IP Group 
currently seeks to commercialise IP developed at 11 of the top 
20 institutions. The Group believes that no other organisation 
seeking to provide commercialisation services to universities has 
as broad a range of access to high-quality research in the UK. 

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comBusiness model

Intellectual 
Capital

Deal flow

Business 
building

Science

The City

Identifying promising research 
opportunities with disruptive IP potential 
across four sectors

Supporting businesses from cradle to maturity with:
• Strategic and commercial expertise  • Executive recruitment
• Administrative and company secretarial  support  
• Legal expertise  • Building management teams

Allowing founders to 
concentrate on exploiting IP

Human
Capital

Financial
Capital

Capital

Providing access to capital through:
• IP Group balance sheet
• Venture capital funds
• Networks of co-investors

Cradle 
to maturity
capability

Systematic
globalisation of 
intellectual
property

Patient 
capital
10+ Yrs

Long-term 
trusted
partnerships

Long-term value

Creating value 
sustainability
IP Group’s business model is based 
on evolving great ideas into world-
changing businesses. As a result, 
the Group delivers economic, social 
and environmental value to all its 
stakeholders:

Economic value 
We seek to achieve attractive returns for our shareholders and our funds’ 
limited partners over the long term. A diversified portfolio of companies 
reduces risk and over-exposure to a single business or sector.

Our portfolio companies benefit from the Group’s patient capital 
approach: sustainable long-term funding to businesses that can be over 
ten or more years 

By providing support beyond financial capital to our portfolio companies, 
we seek to minimise the most common factors that can contribute to 
early-stage company failure. The reduction in administrative burden also 
allows portfolio company founders to concentrate on exploiting IP.

y
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
&
s
s
e
n
i
s
u
B
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

10

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Business & Strategy

Our mission: to evolve great ideas  
into world-changing businesses

Deal flow
–  maintaining a pipeline of potentially disruptive 

commercialisable intellectual property  

IP Group seeks to access a wide range of leading scientific 
research through the formation of long-term partnerships and 
relationships with the top research universities in the UK and 
the US. The Group’s specialist in-house sourcing team works 
with its partners, as well as academics from other universities 
and research institutions, to identify and pursue compelling 
opportunities across four core sectors.

Business Building
–  a rigorous and systematic approach to opportunity 

appraisal, development and business building

During the early stages of an opportunity’s development, 
members of the Group’s team work closely with its founders 
to help shape its strategic direction, often taking an interim 
management role until such time as the business reaches a 
sufficient stage of maturity and has the resources to recruit 
a full external leadership team. The Group team members 
continue to provide strategic guidance in an executive or non-
executive capacity.

The Group supports businesses from cradle to maturity with:

 ■ Strategic and commercial expertise
 ■ Building management teams
 ■ Recruitment of high-calibre individuals through its in-house 

executive search consultancy, IP Exec 

 ■ Innovative and structured programmes for CEOs and boards 
of portfolio companies through IP Impact, the Group’s in-
house unit that seeks to help accelerate company growth

 ■ Administrative and company secretarial support
 ■ Legal expertise

Capital
–  access to sources of capital to finance businesses  

as they develop

IP Group provides patient capital for the development of 
its portfolio companies from its own balance sheet. In 
addition, IP Group has an FCA-regulated venture capital 
fund management subsidiary, Top Technology Ventures 
(“TTV”), which specialises in providing funding for early stage 
technology businesses. TTV currently manages three funds: 
IP Venture Fund, IP Venture Fund II L.P. and the Finance for 
Business North East Technology Fund which, subject to 
investment guidelines, can provide further additional sources 
of capital to the Group’s portfolio companies. TTV and the 
Group also work with a wide network of co-investors which 
can provide further capital alongside the Group.

Long-term value
– systematic commercialisation of intellectual property

IP Group seeks to form, or assist in the formation of, a 
diversified range of spin-out companies based on scientific 
innovation. IP Group’s approach is to take a significant 
minority equity stake in those spin-out companies, to grow 
the value of that equity over time - by taking an active role 
in company development - and to ultimately achieve strong 
equity returns over the medium to long term.

Social value
We have partnerships with 15 of the UK’s, and three of the US’s, leading 
universities which seek to enable preferential access to intellectual 
property. Through these we assist our university partners in the 
commercial development of IP arising from their research efforts.  
Our approach demonstrates our alignment with government initiatives 
in science and innovation.

Developing new potentially high-growth SMEs across the UK 
contributes to entrepreneurism, the creation of new jobs and 
stimulation of both the local and wider economies.

We seek to create a stable, viable business that attracts and  
retains top talent.

Environmental value
A substantial element of the research efforts of our university partners 
seek to address many of the major challenges faced by the world’s 
population. In addition, we actively identify opportunities that potentially 
address significant social and environmental issues. Many of our portfolio 
businesses are focused on developing clean technology, environmental 
improvement and resource efficiency that will hopefully have a positive 
impact on our communities.

11

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategy

Our strategy: systematically  
building businesses

Our strategic aims

What we did in 2014

To create and 
maintain a pipeline 
of compelling 
intellectual property-
based opportunities

To develop and 
support these 
opportunities into a 
diversified portfolio of 
robust businesses

To deliver attractive 
financial returns on 
our assets and third 
party funds

 — Provided initial capital to 11 technology companies (2013: 9)

 — Integrated Fusion IP plc’s partner university relationships into 

the Group

 — Expanded further into the US via a pilot project with 

Princeton University and completed our first US-based  
spin-out with the University of Pennsylvania 

 — Deployed an increased level of capital into the Group’s 

Biotech division – including £4m to support Diurnal Limited 
through Phase 3 clinical trials.

 — Net portfolio fair value increased to £349.9m, a net fair value 

gain of £20.7m

 — Completed acquisition of Fusion IP plc, integrated staff into 

the Group and formally organised the business building team 
into four specialist sector divisions

 — Portfolio increased to 90 companies

 — Board representation on more than 80% of companies by 

number

 — Expanded IP Exec team and completed 16 senior 
appointments, of which five were non-executive 
directorships, with portfolio companies

 — Ran three IP Impact CEO programmes with a total of 22 

participants 

 — Continued to provide other spin-out support services 

including business support, corporate finance and legal 
advice to portfolio companies.

 — Net portfolio fair value gains of £20.7m

 — £97.4m (net of expenses) capital raising successfully 

completed 

 — Deployed capital of £46.8m to portfolio 

 — Portfolio stands at 90 companies with a combined total 

value in excess of £1.9bn

 — Total funds under management of approximately £85m

 — Proceeds from sale of equity and debt of £9.7m

 — Positive share price performance in 2014: an increase in 
excess of 20% and outperformed the FTSE 250 Index.

y
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
&
s
s
e
n
i
s
u
B
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

12

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Business & Strategy

Our strategy is clear: to systematically create, develop and deliver outstanding 
intellectual property-based businesses in order to provide attractive returns 
for all our stakeholders. The Group’s strategy can be broken down into these 
three specific aims and our performance is measured against these.

Objectives for 2015

Link to KPIs

 — Continue to seek and maintain relationships with top US and UK research 

 — Number of new portfolio companies

institutions

 — Replenish the pipeline with a similar level of opportunities.

 Read more on pages 14 and 15

 — Seek to maintain approach of direct IP Group representation on spin-out 

 — Purchase of equity and debt 

company boards

investments

 — Increase number of executive search mandates within IP Exec and assist 

 — Change in fair value of equity  

portfolio companies to increase diversity of boards

and debt investments 

 — Continue to provide specialist support services such as IP Exec, IP Impact, 

 Read more on pages 14 and 15

business support and corporate finance advice.

 — £128m capital raising in early 2015 will facilitate increased rate of capital 

 — Total equity

deployment in 2015

 — Profit/(loss) attributable to equity 

 — Seek to continue net long-term increase in portfolio value and net assets

holders

 — Assist, directly or indirectly, portfolio companies to access public and private 

 — Proceeds from sale of equity 

markets to raise development capital 

 — Where appropriate, generate cash realisations from portfolio

 — Continue to monitor opportunities for additional capital or funds under 

management

 — Generate attractive performance in Group’s managed funds.

investments

 — Change in fair value of equity  

and debt investments 

 Read more on pages 14 and 15

13

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comKey performance indicators

Measuring our performance: 
focusing on delivery against  
our strategy

KPI

Financial KPIs

Further description

2014 performance

Strategic element

(see pages 36 to 39)

director remuneration

Risks potentially impacting KPI

Link to performance-related  

Total equity (“net assets”)

The value of the Group’s assets less the value of 
its liabilities, including minority interest

£526.2m 
(2013: £336.6m)

Profit/(loss) attributable to  
equity holders

Profit/(loss) after tax for the year, attributable to 
owners of the parent

£9.5m 
(2013: £72.6m)

Purchase of equity and debt 
investments

The total level of capital deployed from the 
Group’s balance sheet into portfolio companies 
during the year

£46.8m 
(2013: £27.5m)

Change in fair value of equity and 
debt investments

Movement in the value of holdings in the 
portfolio due to share price movements or 
impairments in value

£20.7m 
(2013: £82.4m)

Proceeds from sale of equity 
investments

The total amount received from the disposal of 
interests in portfolio companies

£9.7m 
(2013: £5.5m)

Non-financial KPIs

Number of new portfolio companies

The number of portfolio companies that received 
initial capital from the Group during the year

11 
(2013: 9)

To grow the value of our assets (and 

those we manage on behalf of third 

parties) and deliver attractive financial 

returns from these assets.

Portfolio fair value movement has the 

most material impact on this figure 

which also reflects corporate expenses. 

Measures the development of portfolio 

companies and return on our assets.

1

2

5

1

2

5

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 

opportunities and develop these into 

2

3 4

robust businesses.

To develop IP-based businesses and 

grow their value.

1

2

Cash from proceeds can be used for  

redeployment into the portfolio or for 

1

5

new opportunities.

 ■ LTIP 2012–2014

 ■ 2014 annual incentive

 ■ 2014 annual incentive

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  

(See above)

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  

(See above)

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  

(See above)

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 

opportunities and develop these into 

3 4

robust businesses.

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  

(See above)

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

14

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

KPI

Financial KPIs

Total equity (“net assets”)

The value of the Group’s assets less the value of 

£526.2m 

its liabilities, including minority interest

(2013: £336.6m)

Profit/(loss) attributable to  

equity holders

Profit/(loss) after tax for the year, attributable to 

£9.5m 

owners of the parent

(2013: £72.6m)

Purchase of equity and debt 

investments

The total level of capital deployed from the 

£46.8m 

Group’s balance sheet into portfolio companies 

(2013: £27.5m)

during the year

Change in fair value of equity and 

debt investments

Movement in the value of holdings in the 

£20.7m 

portfolio due to share price movements or 

(2013: £82.4m)

impairments in value

Proceeds from sale of equity 

investments

The total amount received from the disposal of 

£9.7m 

interests in portfolio companies

(2013: £5.5m)

Non-financial KPIs

Number of new portfolio companies

The number of portfolio companies that received 

11 

initial capital from the Group during the year

(2013: 9)

Further description

2014 performance

Strategic element

Risks potentially impacting KPI
(see pages 36 to 39)

Link to performance-related  
director remuneration

To grow the value of our assets (and 
those we manage on behalf of third 
parties) and deliver attractive financial 
returns from these assets.

Portfolio fair value movement has the 
most material impact on this figure 
which also reflects corporate expenses. 
Measures the development of portfolio 
companies and return on our assets.

1

2

5

1

2

5

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 
opportunities and develop these into 
robust businesses.

2

3 4

To develop IP-based businesses and 
grow their value.

1

2

Cash from proceeds can be used for  
redeployment into the portfolio or for 
new opportunities.

1

5

 ■ LTIP 2012–2014

 ■ 2014 annual incentive

 ■ 2014 annual incentive

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  
(See above)

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  
(See above)

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  
(See above)

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 
opportunities and develop these into 
robust businesses.

3 4

 ■ Indirectly impacts both net assets 

and Group profit/loss  
(See above)

  For more information on our strategy  
see pages 12 and 13

  For more information on our risk 
management see pages 34 to 39

  For more information on Directors’ 
remuneration see pages 58 to 74

15

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOperational review

A busy period: 
expanding our  
partnerships and  
identifying opportunities

During 2014, the Group continued to 
strengthen its financial position and 
expand its access to commercialisable 
science, both in the UK and the US, in 
order to pursue its purpose of evolving 
great ideas into world-changing 
businesses. This will remain our focus 
for 2015 and beyond.

Fusion IP plc (“Fusion IP”) is now fully integrated within 
the Group and we are already benefitting from the 
additional expertise and the larger, more diversified 
portfolio that this acquisition has brought to the business. 
The March 2015 placing of £128m (before expenses) 
will enable the Group to deploy further capital into its 
portfolio companies as well as allowing it to expand its 
access to research and compelling commercialisation 
opportunities across all its sectors in the UK and the US.

Three core objectives support the Group’s purpose: to 
create and maintain a pipeline of compelling intellectual 
property-based opportunities, to develop and support 
these opportunities into a diversified portfolio of robust 
businesses and to deliver attractive financial returns on 
our assets and third party funds. Our performance against 
these objectives is considered in more detail below.

Alan Aubrey  Chief Executive Officer

 ■ Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited (“Oxford 

Nanopore”) completed a significantly oversubscribed £35m 
fundraising round and launched a community-focused 
access programme - the “MinION Access Programme” - to 
allow researchers to begin using its nanopore sequencing 
technology. All aspects of the technology have been trialled, 
improved and developed during the programme with the 
changes leading to an increase in performance and helping 
to expand the range of applications being developed by 
the community. In late 2014, publications outlining novel 
applications for the MinION began to appear. Two waves of 
participants joined the programme during the year and, at the 
beginning of 2015, Oxford Nanopore opened the programme 
to fresh applications.

 ■ Modern Biosciences plc (“MBS”), the Group’s 61.1% owned 

subsidiary, agreed a collaboration with Johnson & Johnson 
Innovation Centre and Janssen Biotech, Inc in relation to  
MBS’ lead programme for the development of novel  
bone-protective compounds in the treatment of rheumatoid 
arthritis. The collaboration could be worth up to £176m 
comprising an upfront payment, an option fee exercisable 
after or during the Phase 1 programme and development-
related milestone payments. Assuming developmental and 
regulatory success, the majority of the £176m could be 
received over the next 7-10 years. In addition, MBS will  
receive royalties on any future sales of products that 
may result from the alliance upon successful launch and 
commercialisation of any treatment. During the year, MBS was 
also awarded a further £2.4m grant by the UK Government’s 
Biomedical Catalyst.

Portfolio company performance
The fair value of the Group’s portfolio increased to £349.9m  
(2013: £285.9m) across 90 businesses that are supported 
and managed by four specialist sector teams. Tracsis plc, Ilika 
plc and new entrants to AIM Xeros Technology Group plc, 
Actual Experience plc and MedaPhor Group plc all contributed 
significantly to an uplift in the fair value of the portfolio. However, 
there were some reductions in fair value, which were primarily due 
to the negative share price performance of some of the quoted 
companies with Applied Graphene Materials plc, Retroscreen 
Virology Group plc and Avacta Group plc among the most 
significant detractors. Some of the key developments of the 
Group’s portfolio companies during the year were as follows:

 ■ With respect to the portfolio acquired with Fusion IP, 

Diurnal Limited successfully completed Phase 2 trials for 
the treatment of Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia, and raised 
£6m to support Phase 3 trials, while MedaPhor Group plc, 
a provider of advanced ultrasound education and training 
simulators for medical professionals, successfully floated on 
AIM. Overall, however, due to fair value reductions in a few 
of the private companies, the Group’s holdings in spin-out 
companies from Fusion IP’s partnerships experienced a net 
fair value reduction of approximately £2m. We remain positive 
about the prospects for the businesses over the long term. 

Further detailed analysis is provided in the Portfolio review on 
pages 18 to 29. 

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

16

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Supporting our portfolio companies
A key differentiator for the Group in its sectors, and an integral 
part of its business model, is the active involvement of its people 
in the development of its spin-out companies. During the early 
stages of an opportunity, members of the Group’s team work 
closely with its founders to help shape its strategic direction, 
often taking an interim management role until such time as is 
it is appropriate to recruit a full external leadership team. The 
Group’s business-building team members continue to provide 
strategic guidance in an executive or non-executive capacity. The 
Group currently has board representation on more than 80% of 
the portfolio companies. IP Exec, the Group’s specialist in-house 
executive search function, assists portfolio companies with the 
recruitment of experienced and able leadership, sourcing high 
quality candidates from a range of backgrounds and disciplines. 
During the year, IP Exec expanded its team to support the 
Group’s portfolio companies more effectively and placed 16 
senior executives with the Group’s portfolio companies during 
the year, an increase on the previous year. IP Impact, which has 
developed a series of innovative programmes to work with CEOs 
and boards of portfolio companies, has also had a successful 
year and continues to contribute to the Group’s growth. CEOs 
from more than 20 of the Group’s portfolio companies have now 
participated in these specialist programmes. In 2014, the Group’s 
specialist business support team provided administrative services 
to 42 of the Group’s portfolio companies.

Expanding and nurturing our partnerships 
IP Group’s ability to access a wide range of innovative scientific 
research, by creating and developing long-term relationships with 
leading research institutions in the UK and US, are considered 
to be an important element of its business model. Some of our 
achievements in 2014 in this regard are highlighted below:

 ■ At the beginning of the year, the Group announced that it 
had expanded its ‘proof of concept’ partnership with the 
University of Manchester to include graphene projects and 
had extended the term to 2019. 

 ■ During the year, the number of US partnerships was increased 

following the signing of an IP commercialisation agreement with 
Princeton University. The partnership, which has an initial pilot 
phase of 18 months, will concentrate on developing early-stage, 
proof of principle opportunities based on intellectual property 
developed at the university. The Group now has partnerships 
with three Ivy League universities in the US including the 
University of Pennsylvania and Columbia University.

 ■ In November, the Group formed a pilot initiative with 

FedIMPACT to identify and develop early-stage technologies 
from a select group of US Department of Energy (“DOE”) 
Laboratories. FedIMPACT will combine its insight and 
knowledge of the DOE network with IP Group’s unique model 
of commercialising early-stage technology.

The Group’s first commercialisation contract was signed with the 
University of Oxford’s Department of Chemistry in 2000 and will 
expire in November 2015. The Group will continue to benefit from 
access to spin-out companies arising from the University of Oxford’s 
Institute of Biomedical Engineering (“IBME”) as a result of its strategic 
stake in, and informal commercialisation alliance with, Technikos 
LLP (“Technikos”), a venture capital fund specialising in early-stage 
medical technologies. Technikos’ long-term commercial agreement 
with the IBME is in place until 2023. The acquisition of Fusion IP 
has enabled a greater degree of exposure to spin-out opportunities 
emanating from its four partner universities.

Maintaining a strong pipeline
The Group seeks to maintain a pipeline of new opportunities 
across a wide variety of scientific disciplines and we continue to 
see many potentially exciting IP commercialisation opportunities 
across all of our partnerships. In 2014, 10 opportunities received 
initial incubation or seed funding during the year (2013: 8). At 
the end of 2014, we completed our first spin-out in the US from 
our partnership with the University of Pennsylvania. The Group 
agreed to provide initial capital of up to $1m for a significant 
minority stake in Exyn Technologies Inc. which has developed 
software to control multi-sensory rotorcraft micro aerial vehicles 
as well as communication between flying vehicles. 

Deploying capital to support our portfolio
An important component of the Group’s business model is its 
ability to support both its existing portfolio companies and new 
early-stage opportunities through the provision of patient capital. 
The £97.4m (net of expenses) raised by the Group through 
the issue of new equity at the beginning of the year, added 
further strength to the Group’s financial position and, as per our 
commitment at that time, the rate of capital deployment into 
our portfolio companies increased significantly to £46.8m for 
the year (2013: £27.5m). The Group also assisted its portfolio 
companies to access capital from a variety of sources and, 
during the year, they raised approximately £165m, in aggregate 
(2013: £160m). The £128m total capital raising announced today 
will enable the Group to continue this trend towards increased 
support for its most promising portfolio company holdings both 
in the UK and US.

In addition, the Group provides capital from its managed funds: 
Top Technology Ventures Limited, the Group’s FCA-regulated 
subsidiary, manages three venture capital funds – IP Venture 
Fund, The North East Technology Fund (“NETF”) and IP Venture 
Fund II, with assets under management totalling £85m at 31 
December 2014. IP Venture Fund, which is no longer making 
investments in new portfolio companies, achieved realisations of 
£11.1m this year. Having launched in 2013, IP Venture Fund II has 
invested a total of £4.5m across 17 spin-out companies alongside 
the Group. NETF completed a total of 32 investments during the 
year into companies in the North East of England bringing its 
total investments since inception close to its committed capital 
of £25m. The Group has access to additional follow-on finance 
for technology companies in the North East of England during 
2015.

Outlook
Leading research institutions in the UK and the US continue 
to carry out world-class research and this provides a wealth of 
scientific discoveries for the Group to seek to commercialise 
alongside its partners. The sector in which the Group operates 
appears to have attracted a number of new entrants during the 
period and, as a result, the availability of, and competition for, 
capital and opportunities has increased. However, IP Group has 
a solid track record, experienced board and senior management 
team and a strong financial position including £97.3m of cash and 
a diverse portfolio valued at £349.9m and this gives the Board 
confidence that the Company has the necessary credentials to 
continue to exploit this significant opportunity and ultimately 
deliver attractive returns to shareholders over the long term.

17

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comPortfolio review

Our portfolio: continuing to  
develop and mature

The Group’s ten largest portfolio 
companies account for almost 73%  
of the total portfolio value (2013: 79%).

16.4 5.6

56.2

58.6

213.1

Portfolio analysis 
by fair value (£m)

Healthcare

Technology

Cleantech

Biotech

Multiple sectors

3

13

31

18

25

19

13

Portfolio by  
number

Healthcare

Technology

Cleantech

Biotech

Multiple sectors

Portfolio by  
stage

Incubation

Seed businesses

33

25

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

Overview
At 31 December 2014 the value of the Group’s 
portfolio had increased to £349.9m, from 
£285.9m in 2013, as a result of a significant 
increase in net investment following the 
Group’s equity capital raising of £100m (before 
expenses), portfolio companies acquired with 
Fusion IP plc (“Fusion IP”) and the fair value 
movements set out opposite. The portfolio 
comprised holdings in 90 companies, 
compared with 72 at 31 December 2013, with 
the ten most valuable portfolio companies 
accounting for almost 73% of the total portfolio 
value (2013: 79%).

During the year to 31 December 2014, the 
Group provided pre-seed, seed and  
post-seed capital totalling approximately 
£46.8m to its portfolio companies, including 
a £5.5m investment into what were previously 
Fusion IP portfolio companies. This rate of 
deployment is a 70% increase on the £27.5m 
provided in 2013 and is consistent with the 
commitments made by management at the 
time of the Group’s 2014 placing. The Directors 
continue to believe that the Group’s ability to 
utilise its increased capital to maintain its equity 
interests in its most promising companies will 
contribute a significant fair value increase in the 
portfolio over the medium to long term.

The Group not only increased total capital 
deployed into its portfolio in 2014 but 
additionally increased the number of new  
spin-out opportunities supported, with initial 
capital being deployed by the Group into 11 
companies during the year (2013: 9). Four 
companies were sold during the period, one 
of which was to another portfolio company, 
while a further two companies were closed or 
fully provided against with a total historic cost 
of £2.7m.

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

18

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Overview

Fair value of portfolio

£349.9m (2013: £285.9m)

Capital provided to portfolio

£46.8m (2013: £27.5m)

Number of portfolio companies

90 (2013: 72)

Realisations from portfolio

£9.7m  (2013: £5.5m)

Number of new portfolio companies

11 (2013: 9)

The most significant contributors to unrealised gains on the 
revaluation of investments comprised Oxford Nanopore 
Technologies Limited (£18.0m), Actual Experience plc (£9.4m) 
and Xeros Technology Group plc (£8.4m). The major contributors 
to the unrealised losses on the revaluation of investments were 
Applied Graphene Materials plc (£8.7m), Retroscreen Virology 
Group plc (£6.1m – net of the £0.5m uplift in the fair value of 
Activiomics Limited upon its acquisition) and Avacta Group plc 
(£6.3m). 

The performance of the Group’s holdings in companies quoted 
on either AIM or ISDX saw a net unrealised fair value decrease 
of £2.5m while the Group’s holdings in unquoted companies 
experienced a net fair value increase of £23.2m. Excluding 
fair value increases to portfolio companies that listed on AIM 
during the year, which include Actual Experience plc and Xeros 
Technology Group plc as noted in the Operational review 
on pages 16 and 17, the performance of the Group’s listed 
portfolio was consistent with the overall performance of the 
AIM market during 2014. Management believes that despite the 
poor performance of the quoted market in 2014, the increasing 
maturity, and technical and commercial progress, of many of its 
underlying portfolio businesses, both quoted and unquoted, will 
continue to contribute to significant future increases in fair value. 

19

During the year, cash proceeds from the realisation of 
investments increased to £9.7m (2013: £5.5m). The proceeds 
predominantly arose from realisations of the Group’s holdings in 
Synairgen plc, Rock Deformation Research Limited and Velocys 
plc, whilst the prior year was primarily driven by the partial 
disposal of interests in Tracsis plc and Velocys plc.

Performance summary
A summary of the gains and losses across the portfolio is as 
follows: 

Unrealised gains on the 
revaluation of investments

Unrealised losses on the 
revaluation of investments

Net fair value gains

Profit/(loss) on disposals of equity 
investments

Change in fair value of Limited 
Partnership interests

Net portfolio gains

2014
£m

2013
£m

63.2

90.3

(42.5)

20.7

1.6

0.5

22.8

(7.9)

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

83.0

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comPortfolio review
continued

Investments and realisations
The Group’s rate of capital deployment increased during 2014, 
with a total of £46.8m being deployed across 51 new and existing 
projects (2013: £27.5m; 44 projects), as follows:

Cash investment analysis by company stage

Incubation opportunities

Seed businesses

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

Total

Proceeds from sales of equity 
investments

2014
£m

0.8

8.2

22.3

15.5

46.8

9.7

2013
£m

0.2

4.2

13.7

9.4

27.5

5.5

Incubation opportunities comprise businesses or pre-incorporation 
projects that are generally at a very early stage of development. 
Opportunities at this stage usually involve capital of less than 
£200,000 from IP Group, predominantly allowing for proof of 
concept work to be carried out. Incubation projects generally  
have a duration of nine to eighteen months, following which  
the opportunity is progressed to seed financing, terminated 
or retained at the pre-seed stage for a further period to allow 
additional proof of concept work to be carried out. Seed 
businesses are those that have typically received financing of up 
to £1m in total, primarily from IP Group, in order to continue to 
progress towards agreed commercial and technology milestones 
and to enable the recruitment of management teams and early 
commercial engagement. 

Post-seed businesses are those that have received some level 
of further funding from co-investors external to IP Group, with 
total funding received generally in excess of £1m. Although 
each business can vary significantly in its rate and manner of 
development, such additional funding is generally used to 
progress towards key milestones and commercial validation, 
to build senior level capability in the business and to attract 
experienced non-executive directors to their boards. This 
category is further broken down into post-seed private and  
post-seed quoted companies. Post-seed quoted companies 
consist of companies quoted on either AIM or the ISDX markets.

The Group has continued to contribute to the development 
of its post-seed businesses with a number announcing further 
financings supported by the Group and/or IPVF, the dedicated 
follow-on venture capital fund managed by the Group. IPVF 
invested a total of £2.7m into existing Group portfolio businesses 
during the year (2013: £1.4m). This fund has sufficient capital 
commitments from its limited partners to invest approximately 
£0.2m further into its existing portfolio. 

Since its inception in May 2013, IP Venture Fund II, the £30m 
venture capital successor fund to IP Venture Fund, has invested 
alongside the Group in 17 companies spun-out from IP Group’s 
university partnerships and other collaborations. At 31 December 
2014, IPVFII had invested £4.5m into spin-out companies from 

incubation stage through seed and post-seed stage, with an 
investment ratio of 30:70 (IP Venture Fund II: IP Group). Further, 
IP Group holds a 33% interest in IP Venture Fund II. In complying 
with IFRS 10, the Group consolidates the assets, liabilities and 
results of IPVFII. In order to reflect meaningful information to its 
shareholders, the detailed sectoral analysis tables included in this 
Portfolio review reflect the Group’s economic interest in portfolio 
company holdings, including an estimate of its “look through” 
interest via IPVFII, which as noted above is calculated as one 
third of IPVFII’s holdings in such companies. The minority interest 
ownership, i.e. that element of IPVFII’s holdings that is attributable 
to external Limited Partners, is reflected in a separate section 
within those tables. 

During the year, 13 companies were added to the Group’s 
portfolio as a result of the Fusion IP acquisition. In addition, ten 
opportunities received initial incubation or seed funding during 
the year (2013: eight) and one initial opportunity received  
post-seed funding. During the period one existing incubation 
project progressed to seed stage (2013: two). 

The eleven new opportunities included: 

 ■ Genomics Limited (University of Oxford) has developed 
a unique analytical platform for genomic sequence data 
analysis and interpretation and has already been awarded two 
grants funded by the Department of Health and managed by 
Genomics England to develop its technology. The company 
is also working with pharmaceutical companies to bring 
the benefits of genomic analysis to the drug development 
process;

 ■ Ultrahaptics Limited (University of Bristol) has developed a 

unique technology that uses ultrasound to project sensations 
through the air and directly onto the user. Users can “feel” 
touchless buttons, get feedback for mid-air gestures or 
interact with virtual objects; 

 ■ Intelligent Ultrasound Limited (University of Oxford), aims to 
improve the reliability and timeliness of diagnosis for patients 
requiring ultrasound scans, won the award for Best Emerging 
Medtech Company at the OBN Annual Awards in October; 
and

 ■ OxSyBio Limited (University of Oxford) will develop 3D 

printing techniques to produce tissue-like synthetic materials 
for wound healing and drug delivery. In the longer term the 
company aims to print synthetic tissues for organ repair or 
replacement.

The average level of capital deployed per company increased 
from £620,000 to £920,000 in 2014. Excluding the Group’s 
participation in Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited’s 2013 
and 2014 financing rounds, the average investment per company 
increased to £820,000 from £530,000 in 2013. The average 
investment per company is expected to increase in the future.

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

20

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Portfolio analysis

Portfolio analysis — by stage of company maturity
At 31 December 2014, the Group’s portfolio fair value of £349.9m was distributed across stages of company maturity as follows:

As at 31 December 2014

Number

Company stage

Incubation opportunities

Seed businesses

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

Fair value
£m

0.9

16.0

194.8

138.2

%

—

5%

56%

39%

All portfolio businesses

349.91

100%

%

13%

29%

37%

21%

100%

Fair value
£m

0.1

11.3

139.4

135.1

285.9

As at 31 December 2013

Number

%

—

4%

49%

47%

100%

%

11%

28%

36%

25%

100%

8

20

26

18

72

1. 

Total fair value includes £4.2m (2013: £0.1m) attributable to minority interests represented by third party limited partners in the consolidated fund, IPVFII.

Of the 90 companies in the Group’s portfolio, 73% (2013: 79%) of the fair value resides in the ten most valuable companies and the 
Group’s holdings in these businesses are valued at a total of £255.1m (2013: £225.2m). 

Portfolio analysis — by sector
The Group funds spin-out companies based on a wide variety of scientific research emerging from leading research intensive 
institutions and does not limit itself to funding companies from particular areas of science. During 2014, after the acquisition of Fusion 
IP, the Group formally split its core opportunity evaluation and business building team into four specialist divisions, being Biotech, 
Cleantech, Healthcare and Technology. The new divisional structure for monitoring and categorising the portfolio is depicted in the 
following table:

As at 31 December 2014

Number

As at 31 December 2013

Number

Sector 

Healthcare

Technology

Cleantech

Biotech

Multiple sectors 

Fair value
£m

213.1 

58.6 

56.2 

16.4 

5.6 

%

61%

17%

16%

5%

1%

%

34%

28%

20%

15%

3%

Fair value
£m

176.3

48.8 

34.2 

6.8 

19.8

%

62%

17%

12%

2%

7%

%

33%

29%

25%

7%

6%

100%

24

21

18

5

4

72

13

25

33

19

90

31

25

18

13

3

90

349.91 

100%

100%

285.9

100%

1. 

Total fair value includes £4.2m (2013: £0.1m) attributable to minority interests represented by third party limited partners in the consolidated fund, IPVFII.

As can be seen from the table, the Group’s portfolio by number of companies is well diversified across the four main sectors. By fair 
value, however, the portfolio is currently more concentrated in the healthcare sector, largely as a result of the relative valuations of the 
Group’s holdings in Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited, Retroscreen Virology Group plc and Tissue Regenix Group plc. 

A more detailed analysis of each sector is set out over the following pages.

21

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comPortfolio review
continued

Case study: Alesi Surgical Limited
Sector: Healthcare
Stage: Post-seed private business

Healthcare

Companies in the Healthcare division saw the most significant 
amount of capital contribution and fair value increase during 
the year. The major contributors to the healthcare portfolio’s 
fair value increase were Oxford Nanopore Technologies 
Limited (£18.0m) and Genomics Limited (£2.5m), which both 
raised money at a premium to their previous financing rounds. 
However, these fair value increases were offset by the poor 
performance of the share prices of the division’s quoted portfolio, 
specifically Retroscreen Virology Group plc (£6.1m unrealised 
fair value decrease – net of the £0.5m uplift in the fair value 
of Activiomics Limited upon its acquisition), Avacta Group 
plc (£6.3m decrease) and Tissue Regenix Group plc (£2.7m 
decrease). 

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited (“Oxford Nanopore”), 
a spin-out company from the University of Oxford, which 
specialises in nanopore-based electronic molecular analysis 
systems, announced in August 2014 that it had completed a 
significantly oversubscribed £35m fundraising. Funds from the 
financing are being used to further develop Oxford Nanopore’s 
commercial and manufacturing infrastructure that has been 
serving early customers through its MinION Access Programme 
(“MAP”), its programme designed to give life science researchers 
access to nanopore sequencing technology. The financing 
resulted in a fair value uplift in the Group’s resultant 19.9% interest 
of £17.8m. Early in the year, Oxford Nanopore announced that 
excellent progress had been made in the early phase of MAP 
and, since the period end, Oxford Nanopore has opened the 
programme to fresh applications. 

In August, Retroscreen Virology Group plc (“Retroscreen 
Virology”), a spin-out from Queen Mary University of London, 
announced that it had raised £33.6m before expenses in an 
oversubscribed placing. The Group contributed £4.0m to the 
placing, which resulted in a holding of 17.5%. Retroscreen 
Virology, which pioneered the commercialisation of the hVIVO 

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

22

Human Challenge Models of disease, seeks to leverage its hVIVO 
platform as a powerful tool in biomarker discovery and the 
development of new disease models. 

In May, Avacta Group plc (“Avacta”), a provider of innovative 
diagnostic tools, consumables and reagents for human and 
animal healthcare, raised £10.1m before expenses. The proceeds 
are being used to accelerate Avacta’s development and 
commercialisation of affimers, engineered proteins that mimic 
specificity and binding affinities of antibodies. 

MedaPhor Group plc (“MedaPhor”), a spin-out from the University 
of Cardiff, announced its admission to AIM in August. MedaPhor 
is a provider of advanced ultrasound education and training 
simulators for medical professionals. Its lead product is the 
ScanTrainer ultrasound simulator training platform which assists 
students, doctors and sonographers to acquire ultrasound 
scanning skills with minimal expert supervision and without the 
need for a patient on which to practise. In January 2015, the 
company announced the availability of its first radiology-focused 
Super Assessment module for its award-winning ScanTrainer 
simulator. The module will form part of the new Upper Abdomen 
Education Packages which are a range of solution bundles, 
designed specifically for radiology, aimed at teaching complex 
trans-abdominal ultrasound scanning skills in a self-learning 
environment.

Genomics Limited (“Genomics”), a spin-out from the University of 
Oxford, has developed a unique analytical platform for genomic 
sequence data analysis and interpretation and has already been 
awarded two grants, funded by the Department of Health and 
managed by Genomics England, to develop its technology. 
Genomics is also working with pharmaceutical companies to 
bring the benefits of genomic analysis to the drug development 
process. In November, the company completed a £10.3m 
fundraising of which the Group (including the Group’s share of 
IPVFII’s investment) contributed £2.3m.

In June 2014, Tissue Regenix Group plc (“Tissue Regenix”), 
the regenerative medical devices company, launched its 
DermaPure™ “de-cellularised” dermis product in the US. In 
February 2015, the company completed a £20m placing of 
which the Group contributed £2.5m. Tissue Regenix continues to 
expand its distribution network around the US and currently has a 
network of over 60 representatives there.

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Ultravision has already received overwhelming interest from 
the surgical community and, during the year, Alesi established 
a distribution network to supply the device to hospitals across 
Europe, the Middle East, New Zealand and Australia.

In 2014, Alesi’s Ultravision product won several prestigious 
awards including the Royal College of Surgeons’ Cutlers’ 
Surgical Prize for best surgical innovation and a ‘Business Impact 
(Aspiring) Award’ at PraxisUnico’s Impact Awards. 

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

A revolutionary new system for  
controlling surgical smoke 
Alesi Surgical Limited* (“Alesi”) is a spin-out from Cardiff 
University and its vision is to become a world leader in the 
development of advanced medical devices. Initially focusing 
on Minimally Invasive Surgery, Alesi is working with leading 
surgeons to identify and find solutions for the issues they most 
commonly experience when performing complex surgical 
procedures. “Ultravision” – the first product to be launched 
by Alesi – removes surgical smoke from the operative visual 
field and prevents its release into the operating theatre during 
laparoscopic (“keyhole”) surgery. As a result, surgery can be 
carried out more quickly and in a more efficient and  
cost-effective manner than with current vacuum-based 
solutions. Ultravision also reduces the surgical team’s exposure 
to surgical smoke, which is both unpleasant and could have 
long-term health implications.     

* Formerly known as Asalus Medical Instruments Limited

Group stake
at 31 Dec
2014(i)
%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

Year to 31 December 2014

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Acquired 
with 
Fusion IP
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2014
£m

Company name

Description

Oxford Nanopore 
Technologies Limited

Retroscreen Virology 
Group plc

Single-molecule detection. 1st 
application in 3rd generation DNA 
sequencing (“$1000 genome”)

Viral challenge and ‘virometrics’ 
specialist (“conquering viral 
disease”)

19.9%

104.3

6.0

17.5%

30.5(ii)

4.0

Tissue Regenix 
Group plc

Regenerative dCELL® soft tissue 
body parts

13.7%

20.7

Avacta Group plc

Reagents, arrays and instruments 
for human and animal healthcare

26.9%

12.2

Genomics Limited

Platform for analysis and 
interpretation of genomic 
sequence data

MedaPhor Group plc

Advanced ultrasound education 
and training simulators

18.6%

41.6%

Other companies

IP Group total

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

—

0.5

8.1

176.3

—

176.3

—

2.5

2.3

1.4

5.2

21.4

1.9

23.3

—

—

—

—

—

1.5

4.3

5.8

—

5.8

18.0

128.3

(6.1)

28.4

(2.7)

18.0

(6.3)

8.4

2.5

1.2

0.3

6.9

0.8

7.7

4.8

4.6

17.9

210.4

2.7

213.1

(i)  Represents the Group’s undiluted beneficial equity interest (excluding debt) including the portion of IPVFII’s stake attributable to the Group.

(ii) 

Includes Activiomics Limited, another Group portfolio company, which was acquired by Retroscreen Virology in March 2014, for paper valued at £1.4m, representing an uplift 
of £0.5m on its opening value. The opening value of Retroscreen Virology has been increased to reflect the opening fair value of Activiomics Limited.

An analysis of the number and value of portfolio companies in the sector by stage of development is as follows:

Stage

Incubation

Seed

Post-seed

Quoted

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

Number

5

7

14

5

n/a

31

Value 
(£m)

0.2 

5.2 

145.5 

59.5 

2.7

213.1

23

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comPortfolio review
Portfolio review
continued
continued

Case study: Ultrahaptics Limited
Sector:  Technology
Stage: Seed

Technology

Companies in the Technology division received net investment 
of £4.6m and saw a fair value decrease of £0.8m during the 
year. Significant unrealised fair value gains were achieved as a 
result of an increase in Actual Experience plc’s share price since 
its admission to AIM as well as Tracsis plc’s share performance. 
However, this was offset by the poor performance of Applied 
Graphene Materials plc’s share price, by Phase Focus Limited’s 
funding at a price lower than its previous funding round and 
impairments to a number of the division’s smaller portfolio 
companies. 

In February, Actual Experience plc, an “analytics as a service” 
spin-out from Queen Mary University of London, listed on AIM. 
Actual Experience plc’s technology enables the measurement 
of digital performance quality, allowing customers to improve 
the performance of the software business applications that 
they provide to their staff and their own clients. This reduces 
costs while improving the experience of the user. In January 
2015, the company announced that it had made material 
commercial progress with its channel partners and had achieved 
national media coverage of its analysis, following its publication 
in Ofcom’s triennial infrastructure report. In addition, Actual 
Experience plc strengthened its sales and senior management 
teams, and established a US operation.

Developments at Tracsis plc (“Tracsis”), a leading provider of 
operational planning software to the passenger transport 
industries, included its acquisition of rail software company 
Datasys Integration Limited, the establishment of its North 
American pilot programme and increases in its revenues of 
106% to £22.4m (2013: £10.8m). In contrast to the general 
performance of AIM in 2014, Tracsis’s share price performed well 
and saw over 100% appreciation in value. 

In July, Surrey NanoSystems Limited announced that it had 
launched the world’s darkest material, Vantablack®, that can 
be used to enhance the range and sensitivity of optics. The 
company’s patented nanotechnology has the highest thermal 
conductivity and lowest mass-volume of any material that can be 
used in high-emissivity applications. 

In March, Schlumberger announced that it had acquired Rock 
Deformation Research, a company specialising in geological 
software development and structural geology consultancy for 
the oil and gas industry.

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

24

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Feeling without touching 
The ability to feel virtual objects in mid-air has now been turned 
into a reality by Ultrahaptics Limited (“Ultrahaptics”), a leading 
developer of ultrasonic free-space haptics technology. The 
unique technology, created by the University of Bristol 
spin-out, uses ultrasound to project sensations through the air 
and directly onto the user. There is no requirement for the user 
to wear or touch anything in order to receive tactile feedback. 

The Ultrahaptics Evaluation Program, which allows members 
of the program to evaluate, experiment and develop concept 
products featuring mid-air tactile feedback, has been met with 
overwhelming demand and a number of large multinational 
companies have already purchased the prototype.

This touchless haptics innovation has registered global interest 
and, at the beginning of 2015, Ultrahaptics was awarded a 
CES 2015 Top Picks Award by Laptop Mag for ‘Best Enabling 
Technology’. The technology will be licensed into a diverse array 
of markets including consumer electronics, home appliances 
and the automotive sector, and could transform how people 
interact with computers, automobiles and games in the future. 

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

Company name

Description

Group stake
at 31 Dec
2014(i)
%

Actual Experience plc

Tracsis plc

Optimising the human experience 
of networked applications 

Resource optimisation software 
for the transport industry

29.7%

10.5%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

4.7 

5.5 

Applied Graphene 
Materials plc

Producer of speciality graphene 
materials

Surrey Nanosystems 
Limited

Low temperature carbon 
nanotube growth

20.3%

14.9

21.6%

2.3

Phase Focus Limited

Aberration-free quantitative 
phase imaging

38.4%

Other companies

IP Group total

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

— 

21.3

48.7 

0.1 

48.8 

Year to 31 December 2014

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Acquired 
with  
Fusion IP
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2014
£m

—

—

—

0.6

1.0 

2.8

4.4 

0.2 

4.6 

—

—

—

—

3.3 

2.7 

6.0 

—

6.0 

9.4 

14.1 

5.8 

11.3 

(8.7) 

6.2 

0.7 

(1.4)

(6.6)

(0.8)

—

(0.8)

(i)  Represents the Group’s undiluted beneficial equity interest (excluding debt) including the portion of IPVFII’s stake attributable to the Group.

An analysis of the number and value of portfolio companies in the sector by stage of development is as follows:

Stage

Incubation

Seed

Post-seed

Quoted

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

Number

5

7

7

6

n/a

25

3.6

2.9 

20.2 

58.3 

0.3

58.6 

Value 
(£m)

0.3 

4.7 

15.8 

37.5 

0.3 

58.6 

25

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
Portfolio review
Portfolio review
Portfolio review
continued
continued
continued

Case study: Xeros Technology Group plc
Sector: Cleantech
Stage: Post-seed quoted

Cleantech

The unrealised fair value gain of 19% seen by the Cleantech 
division portfolio was largely as a result of an increase in value 
of Xeros Technology Group plc (£8.4m), following its IPO on 
AIM, as well as Ilika plc (£3.4m) and Ceres Power Holdings plc 
(£1.9m), whose share prices performed positively during the year. 
This increase was partially offset by a decrease of £7.1m from the 
remainder of the division’s portfolio. 

Ceres Power Holdings plc (“Ceres”), a world-leading developer 
of low cost, next generation fuel cell technology for use in 
distributed generation and other applications, announced in 
July that it had raised £20m (gross of expenses) by way of an 
oversubscribed placing. The purpose of the placing was to 
provide the company with sufficient working capital to enable 
it to respond to the commercial interest it has generated, to 
continue to develop its technology roadmap and to enhance its 
manufacturing capability. 

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

26

In March, Xeros Technology Group plc (“Xeros”), a spin-out from 
the University of Leeds that has developed a patented polymer 
bead cleaning system, gained admission to AIM and raised gross 
proceeds of £27.6m. The admission and fundraising allowed 
Xeros to accelerate the roll-out of its technology in commercial 
laundries and to fund the research and development process 
through to commercialisation in other identified applications, 
not least the home. In May, Xeros announced that the first 
major utility company in the US had launched energy incentive 
programmes for customers who commit to reducing their 
energy consumption through the use of a Xeros Commercial 
Laundry System. To date, eight utility companies in the US have 
launched similar energy incentive programmes.

During 2014, the Group exited its remaining interest in Velocys 
plc. From the Group’s initial investment date into Velocys in 2005 
to the final exit date in 2014, the Group had invested £0.4m in the 
company and realised cumulative proceeds of £12.9m. 

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Bringing innovation to the 
laundry industry for the first  
time in more than 60 years
Xeros Technology Group plc (“Xeros”) has received many 
accolades for its revolutionary clothes-cleaning technology. The 
innovative system, which uses reusable and recyclable polymer 
beads, has been shown to offer many benefits when compared 
to conventional washing methods: it consumes significantly less 
water, is able to clean clothes at lower temperatures (therefore 
reducing energy consumption) and reduces colour fading 
and damage to fabric. Xeros’ system is already being used in 
commercial laundries, in the UK and the US, with the Company 
also targeting the domestic laundry market.

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

A spin-out from the University of Leeds, Xeros hit many 
milestones during the year, which included: 

 ■ Listing on the AIM market of the London Stock Exchange in 

March, having raised £27.6m before expenses

 ■ Announcing that the first major utility company in the US had 
launched energy incentive programmes for customers who 
commit to reducing their energy consumption through the 
use of a Xeros Commercial Laundry System. To date, eight 
utility companies in the US have launched similar energy 
incentive programmes.

 ■ Being awarded a EU grant of €700,000 to support early  
take-up of the Xeros polymer bead cleaning system by 
European commercial laundries

 ■ Securing four of the five largest hotel groups in the world as 

customers

 ■ Developing late stage prototypes for its domestic laundry 

machine.

Xeros has identified a number of other applications for this 
technology and has selected the leather processing market, 
worth $50bn globally, as the next area to explore.

Company name

Description

Group stake
at 31 Dec
2014(i)
%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

Year to 31 December 2014

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Acquired 
with 
Fusion IP
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2014
£m

4.2 

2.2 

Ceres Power  
Holdings plc 

Ceramic fuel cell technology for 
distributed generation

23.5%

10.3 

Xeros Technology 
Group plc

Ilika plc

Polymer bead cleaning systems

11.9%

3.2 

Development of new materials 
for energy and electronics 
applications

7.6%

0.9 

0.5 

Seren Photonics 
Limited

Nano-engineered structures to 
enhance the properties of LEDs

66.3%

0.9 

High torque magnetic 
transmissions

Speciality catalysts for the 
generation of clean fuels

51.8%

—

Magnomatics Limited

Velocys plc 

Other companies

IP Group total

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

1.0 

1.2 

16.7 

34.2 

— 

34.2 

0.5 

0.6 

(1.2)

2.0 

8.8 

1.1 

9.9 

—

—

—

2.3 

1.9 

—

1.2 

5.4 

— 

5.4 

(i)  Represents the Group’s undiluted beneficial equity interest (excluding debt) including the portion of IPVFII’s stake attributable to the Group.

An analysis of the number and value of portfolio companies in the sector by stage of development is as follows:

Stage

Incubation

Seed

Post-seed

Quoted

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

Number

1

7

5

5

n/a

18

1.9 

16.4 

8.4 

13.8 

3.4 

4.8 

—

—

—

(7.1)

6.6 

0.1

6.7 

3.7 

3.5 

—

12.8 

55.0 

1.2 

56.2 

Value 
(£m)

0.1 

5.0 

9.8 

40.1 

1.2 

56.2 

27

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comPortfolio review
Portfolio review
Portfolio review
Portfolio review
continued
continued
continued
continued

Case study: Diurnal Limited
Sector: Biotech
Stage: Private (post-seed)

Biotech

While there was a modest increase in the fair value of the Group’s 
holdings in Biotech portfolio companies, largely as a result of 
Diurnal Limited’s £6m fundraising being completed at a premium 
to its previous financing round, additionally there were significant 
underlying developments within Diurnal Limited itself and 
portfolio companies Modern Biosciences plc and Synairgen plc. 

Diurnal Limited (“Diurnal”), a spin-out company from the 
University of Sheffield, announced positive Phase 2 data for its 
lead product, Chronocort®. Chronocort is in development for 
the treatment of Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia (“CAH”), a rare 
condition characterised by a lack of the natural steroid-hormone, 
cortisone. Chronocort represents an entirely novel approach to 
a debilitating disease that is inadequately controlled by current 
drugs and is the subject of Orphan Drug designation from the 
European Medicines Agency. During 2014, the Group took the 
decision to lead a round designed to fund Chronocort’s pivotal 
Phase 3 studies, with a view to eventually taking the product 
to market. The Group anticipates that Diurnal’s lead product 
Chronocort and its second product, Infacort®, for the treatment 
of childhood CAH, will enter Phase 3 studies during 2015. 

Modern Biosciences plc (“MBS”), a subsidiary company of the 
Group that in-licenses and develops intellectual property relating 
to new therapeutic compounds using a virtual drug-discovery 
model, entered into an R&D alliance and global option and 
licence agreement with Janssen Biotech, Inc. in relation to 
MBS’s novel bone-protective compounds for the treatment 
of rheumatoid arthritis (“RA”). The goal of the collaboration, 
facilitated by the Johnson & Johnson Innovation Centre in 
London, is to develop new drugs for the treatment of RA. The 
collaboration could be worth up to £176m comprising an upfront 
payment, an option fee exercisable after or during the Phase 1  
programme and development-related milestone payments. 
Assuming developmental and regulatory success, the majority 
of the £176m could be received over the next 7-10 years. In 
addition, MBS will be eligible to receive royalties on future sales 
of any products that may result from the alliance upon successful 
launch and commercialisation. As MBS is currently consolidated 
into the Group’s results, it is not attributed any value in the 
Group’s portfolio.

Synairgen plc (“Synairgen”), a spin-out from the University of 
Southampton focused on respiratory disease, also announced 
a global licensing deal for its lead asthma/COPD drug SNG001 
with AstraZeneca. Total deal size was $232.5m, including a 
$7.25m upfront payment and potential developmental, regulatory 
and commercial milestones, plus royalties. Shortly after the 
announcement of this deal, the Group exited its position in 
Synairgen, realising proceeds of £4.3m against total capital 
deployed of £1.3m. 

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

28

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Diurnal is seeking to address this with its lead product 
Chronocort, which is specifically designed to provide 
physiological cortisol replacement throughout the day in a 
manner that mimics the natural circadian rhythm. The drug 
is taken in oral form and has the potential to significantly 
improve patients’ quality of life. 

In 2014, a six month Phase 2 clinical study of Chronocort was 
successfully completed on adults suffering from CAH. Pivotal 
Phase 3 trials of Chronocort are due to start in 2015 as Diurnal 
seeks to progress the drug towards market authorisation.   

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

Seeking to optimise health  
through physiological hormone  
replacement 
Diurnal Limited (“Diurnal”), a spin-out from the University 
of Sheffield, is leveraging its expertise in circadian-based 
endocrinology (mimicking the body’s natural hormone levels) 
to develop products for the treatment of hormone deficiency. 
Specific focus is on the life-long treatment for chronic 
conditions including: adrenal insufficiency, hypogonadism, 
and hypothyroidism. 

Adrenal insufficiency and its genetic form Congenital 
Adrenal Hyperplasia (“CAH”) occur when the body is unable 
to produce cortisol, an essential hormone for regulating 
metabolism and responding to stress, and it is thought that 
there are over 250,000 sufferers worldwide. Current therapy 
– the replacement of the hormone with synthetic steroids – 
is unable to simulate the distinctive daily rhythm of cortisol 
release. Poor control of the disease can result in precocious 
puberty in infants, virilization, infertility and fatigue while 
overuse of the steroids can result in obesity, hypertension, 
diabetes and osteoporosis. 

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

Year to 31 December 2014

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Acquired 
with  
Fusion IP
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2014
£m

Company name

Description

Diurnal Limited

Novel treatments of hormone 
deficiency

Absynth Biologics 
Limited

Vaccines and therapeutic 
antibodies

Group stake
at 31 Dec
2014(i)
%

51.7%

45.0%

Karus Therapeutics 
Limited

Inflammatory disease and cancer

8.6%

Synairgen plc

Respiratory diseases

—

Other companies

IP Group total

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

—

—

0.9 

4.3 

1.6 

6.8 

—

6.8 

4.0 

0.3 

0.6 

(4.3)

0.5 

1.1 

—

1.1 

5.1 

1.5 

—

—

0.9 

7.5 

—

7.5 

(i)  Represents the Group’s undiluted beneficial equity interest (excluding debt including the portion of IPVFII’s stake attributable to the Group.

An analysis of the number and value of portfolio companies in the sector by stage of development is as follows:

Stage

Incubation

Seed

Post-seed

Quoted

Value not attributable to equity holders

Total

Number

2

3

6

2

n/a

13

1.0 

10.1 

—

—

—

— 

1.0 

— 

1.0 

1.8 

1.5 

— 

3.0 

16.4 

 —

16.4 

Value 
(£m)

0.1 

—

16.0 

0.3 

—

16.4 

29

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comFinancial review

Satisfactory financial 
performance and a  
strong balance sheet

The Group and its portfolio Companies 
saw a number of significant 
developments during the year. From 
a financial perspective, the Group had 
another profitable year, although it 
was less profitable than in 2013 and, 
following the acquisition of Fusion IP 
and equity fundraisings in the early 
part of both 2014 and 2015, the Group 
continues to benefit from a substantial 
balance sheet.

Greg Smith  Chief Financial Officer

Statement of comprehensive income
A summary analysis of the Group’s financial performance during 
the year is provided below:

Net portfolio gains

Licensing income

Other income

Change in fair value of Oxford 
Equity Rights asset 

Amortisation of intangible assets

Acquisition costs

Administrative expenses –  
Modern Biosciences plc

Administrative expenses – all 
other businesses

Finance income

Profit and total comprehensive 
income for the year

2014
£m

22.8

3.0

2.6

(1.8)

(4.9)

(1.1)

(1.8)

(9.9)

0.6

9.5

2013
£m

83.0

—

2.4

(5.0)

—

—

(0.5)

(7.7)

0.4

72.6

Net portfolio gains consist primarily of realised and unrealised fair 
value gains and losses from the Group’s equity and debt holdings 
in spin-out businesses as well as changes in the fair value of 
its limited and limited liability partnership interests. A detailed 
analysis of fair value gains and losses is provided in the Portfolio 
review on pages 18 to 29. 

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

30

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

Total equity (“net assets”) (£m)

£526.2m  (2013: £336.6 m)

526.2

336.6

263.1

221.6

173.1

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Profit/(loss) attributed to equity holders (£m)

£9.5m  (2013: £72.6m)

72.6

40.7

1.8
2010

(5.5)
2011

9.5

2012

2013

2014

Cash, cash equivalents and deposits (£m)

£97.3m  (2013: £24.1m)

97.3

60.5

47.9

21.5

24.1

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Other income for the year remained relatively consistent 
at £2.6m (2013: £2.4m). Other income comprises fund 
management fees, as well as consulting and similar fees typically 
chargeable to its portfolio companies for services including 
executive search and selection, legal and administrative support. 
Fund management fees are received from the Group’s three 
managed funds, two of which also have the potential to generate 
performance fees from successful investment performance (IP 
Venture Fund (“IPVF”) and North East Technology Fund (“NETF”)). 
As a result of an extension by its limited partner during the period, 
NETF’s “investment period” is now anticipated to continue until 
the end of 2015, while that of IPVF ceased in 2012. The fund 
management fees for both funds reduce following the cessation 
of their investment periods. The results of the Group’s third 
managed fund, IPVFII, are consolidated into those of the Group 
and accordingly the fund management fees received are not 
reflected in the statement of comprehensive income.

As a result of Modern Biosciences plc’s R&D alliance and global 
option and licence agreement with Janssen Biotech, Inc. 
(“Janssen”), the Group became entitled to an upfront payment 
of £3.0m (£2.1m net of sub-licensing and other costs) during 
the period, which was subsequently received in cash in January 
2015. The Group allocated an increased level of capital to the 
evaluation and development of certain early-stage therapeutic 
programmes, including through its subsidiary Modern Bioscience 
plc (“MBS”), during the year. The majority of these costs related 
to the OxteoRx programme that is the subject of the R&D 
alliance with Janssen. All development costs are expensed to 
the statement of comprehensive income as they are incurred. 
MBS continued to benefit from the recovery of a proportion of 
the OsteoRx costs through a Biomedical Catalyst grant, with the 
net expense being reflected in the statement of comprehensive 
income. The Group intends to continue developing a small 
number of early-stage therapeutic assets.

The Group’s administrative expenses, excluding those relating to 
MBS, increased during the period to £9.9m (2013: £7.7m). This is 
predominantly due to an increase in the cost base, following the 
Fusion IP plc (“Fusion IP”) acquisition, and is inclusive of an IFRS 
2 share-based payments charge totalling £0.9m (2013: £0.9m), 
which relates to the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan and 
Annual Incentive Scheme awards. This non-cash charge reflects 
the fair value of services received from employees, measured by 
reference to the fair value of the share-based payments at the 
date of award, but has no net impact on the Group’s total equity 
or net assets. 

As a result of the Group’s £97.4m equity capital raising (net 
of expenses) at the beginning of the year, and the resultant 
increased average cash balance during the year, the Group’s 
interest receivable during the period increased to £0.6m  
(2013: £0.4m). 

31

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comFinancial review
continued

Statement of financial position
The Group ended the period with net assets attributable to 
shareholders of £526.2m, representing an increase of £189.2m 
from the position at 1 January 2014 (£337.0m). As described 
above, the most significant contributing factors to the increase 
in net assets during the period was the £97.4m (net of expenses) 
capital raising, the acquisition of Fusion IP and the performance 
of the Group’s portfolio of holdings in spin-out companies. “Hard” 
net assets, i.e. those excluding intangible assets and the Oxford 
Equity Rights asset, totalled £451.3m at 31 December 2014 (2013: 
£315.5m).

At 31 December 2014 the Group held cash and deposits of 
£97.3m (2013: £24.1m) and a diversified portfolio of equity and 
debt investments in 90 private and publicly listed technology 
companies (2013: 72), 13 of which were added to the Group’s 
portfolio as a result of the Fusion IP acquisition. 

The value of the Group’s holdings in portfolio companies 
increased to £349.9m at year end (2013: £285.9m) after net 
unrealised fair value gains of £20.7m and net investment of 
£37.1m (2013: £82.4m net unrealised fair value gain; £22.0m net 
investment). The Portfolio review on pages 18 to 29 contains a 
detailed description of the Group’s portfolio of equity and debt 
investments including key developments and movements during 
the year. 

The Group’s statement of financial position includes goodwill 
of £57.1m (2013: £18.4m), acquired intangible assets of £16.5m 
and an equity rights asset of £1.1m (2013: £2.9m). The goodwill 
and acquired intangible assets values arose as a result of the 
Group’s acquisition of Fusion IP. The previous year’s goodwill 
balance arose from historical acquisitions of Techtran Group 
Limited (university partnership business, £16.3m; 2013: £16.3m) 
and Top Technology Ventures Limited (venture capital fund 
management business, £2.1m; 2013: £2.1m). The intangible 
assets are separately identifiable assets resulting from Fusion 
IP’s agreements with its partner universities. The fair value of the 
intangible assets will be amortised on a straight line basis over 
each partnership’s useful economic life. 

The equity rights asset represents amounts paid to the University 
of Oxford in 2000 and 2001 giving the Group the right to receive 
50% of the university’s entitlement to equity in any spin-out 
company and of any licensing income emanating from the 
University of Oxford’s Department of Chemistry until November 
2015. Based on the Directors’ calculations, and as described 
more fully in note 14 to the Group’s financial statements, the 
fair value of the contract at 31 December 2014 has reduced by 
£1.8m (2013: £5.0m) to £1.3m (2013: £3.1m) and its value by 31 
December 2015 will be £nil.

Due to the nature of its activities, the Group has limited current 
assets or current liabilities other than its cash and short-term 
deposit balances, which are considered in more detail opposite.

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
P
r
u
O

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

32

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Our Performance

It remains the Group’s policy to place cash, which is surplus 
to near-term working capital requirements, on short-term and 
overnight deposits with financial institutions that meet the 
Group’s treasury policy criteria or in low-risk treasury funds rated 
“A” or above. The Group’s treasury policy is described in detail in 
note 2 to the Group financial statements alongside details of the 
credit ratings of the Group’s cash and deposit counterparties. 

At 31 December 2014, the Group recognised £4.5m of loans 
(2013: £1.3m) from the limited partners of IPVFII, a fund raised 
during 2013 that is consolidated by the Group. These loans are 
repayable only upon IPVFII generating sufficient returns to repay 
the limited partners. Whilst the Group continued to have no 
borrowings, it may in the future consider introducing a modest 
level of gearing into the business if this is considered to be in the 
best interests of the Group.

At 31 December 2014 the Group had a total of £1.2m  
(2013: £0.1m) in US Dollars held to meet the short-term  
working capital requirements of its US operations, including 
capital anticipated to be required by new and existing spin-out 
company opportunities.

Taxation
Since the Group’s activities, including its activities in the US, 
are substantially trading in nature the Directors continue to 
believe that the Group qualifies for the Substantial Shareholdings 
Exemption (“SSE”) on chargeable gains arising on the disposal of 
qualifying holdings and, as such, the Group has continued not to 
recognise a provision for deferred taxation in respect of uplifts in 
value on those equity stakes which meet the qualifying criteria. 
The Group’s unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities are 
set out in note 9 to the financial statements. 

Cash, cash equivalents and short-term 
deposits (“Cash”)
The principal constituents of the movement in Cash during the 
year are summarised as follows:

Net cash used in operating 
activities (excluding cash flows  
to/from deposits)

Net cash used in investing 
activities

Issued share capital

Acquisition of subsidiary

Movement during period

2014
£m

2013
£m

(6.4)

(1.9)

(35.4)

(21.9)

97.4

17.6

73.2

—

—

(23.8)

At 31 December 2014, the Group’s Cash totalled £97.3m, an 
increase of £73.2m from a total of £24.1m at 31 December 2013 
predominantly due to a net £97.4m increase from the issue of 
new equity capital and £17.6m through the acquisition of Fusion 
IP offset by net investment in the Group’s spin-out companies.

The Group’s net cash used in investing activities increased during 
2014, reflecting both an increase in investments (2014: £46.8m; 
2013: £27.5m) and an increase in realisations (2014: £9.7m; 2013: 
£5.5m). As described in more detail in the Portfolio review on 
pages 18 to 29, the Group allocated a total of £46.8m across 
51 portfolio companies during the period (2013: £27.5m; 44 
companies).

A further £0.3m was committed to IP Venture Fund (2013: 
£0.2m), which in turn invested £2.7m across eight portfolio 
companies (2013: £1.4m; 6 companies). The Group received a 
distribution of £1.1m following IP Venture Fund realising £11.1m 
from two exits and one partial disposal. 

Overall, net cash used in investing activities totalled £35.4m 
(2013: £21.9m). 

Primarily as a result of an increase in the Group’s cost base post 
the acquisition of Fusion IP, cash used in operating activities 
increased to £6.4m (2013: £1.9m).

33

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comRisk management

Managing risk: our framework for 
balancing risk and reward

A robust and effective risk management framework is essential for the Group to achieve 
its strategic objectives and to ensure that the Directors are able to manage the business 
in a sustainable manner, which protects its employees, partners, shareholders and other 
stakeholders. Ongoing consideration of, and regular updates to, the policies intended to 
mitigate risk enable the effective balancing of risk and reward.

The framework for evaluating risk is:

Ongoing process to evaluate 
and update the risk management 
framework, to consider the level of risk 
appetite for each risk and the operating 
effectiveness of each ‘line of defence’.

Develop and 
communicate 
strategy and 
objectives

Risk assessments  
are monitored 
regularly by the  
Audit Committee  
and overseen by  
the Board. 

Review and 
monitor 
success of 
actions

Risk
Framework

Identify and 
assess risks

Financial and non-financial 
risks are recorded in the 
Group’s risk register. Risks 
are analysed for likelihood 
and potential impact.

Mitigate risk

Required actions are 
agreed and assigned, and 
deadlines are set. 

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
k
s
i
R
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

34

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Risk management

‘Levels of defence’ applied by the Group:

Strategic

Operational

External

Audit Committee (2) 

Remuneration Committee (3)

Nomination Committee (4)

Board (1)

Executive management (5) 

Investment Committee (6) 

Legal

Compliance (7) 

Independent assurance (8)

1.  The Board has overall responsibility 

for the Group’s risk management and 
internal controls, sets the ‘tone from 
the top’, sets the strategic objectives, 
defines the risk appetite and monitors 
the risk exposure. The whistleblowing 
policy encourages disclosures to be 
addressed to the Board Chairman and/
or any other Non-executive Director.

2.  The Audit Committee oversees the 
effectiveness of the internal control 
function and risk management 
systems within the Group.

3.  The Remuneration Committee 

ensures the appropriate incentivisation 
of Executive Directors and staff. 

4.  The Nomination Committee ensures 
that the Board has the appropriate 
balance of skills and knowledge 
required to assess and address risk, 
and that appropriate succession plans 
are in place. 

5.  Executive management identify, assess 

and manage the risks identified. 

6.  The Investment Committee reviews 

the merits of each investment 
proposal and ensures that investment 
decisions are aligned with the Group’s 
strategic objectives and within the 
acceptable risk limits. 

7.  The compliance function ensures that 
all regulated activity undertaken is 
within the regulated boundaries and 
permissions.

8.  Independent assurance is provided by 
the independent auditors and various 
external consultants and advisers. 
External consultants and advisers 
support management and the Board 
through ad hoc consulting activities, 
as required. 

35

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comRisk management
continued

The operations of the Group, and the implementation of its objectives and strategy, 
are subject to a number of key risks and uncertainties. All levels of management have 
responsibility for identifying and reporting on risks, which are reviewed by the Board at 
least twice a year, and appropriate procedures are put in place to monitor and, to the 
extent possible, mitigate these risks. 

Risk and description

Impact

Mitigation

Risk trend

Developments during the year

KPI

1 The returns and cash proceeds from the Group’s 

early-stage companies can be very uncertain

The following risks are typically associated with early-stage companies:

 ■ may not be able to secure later rounds of funding;

 ■ may not be able to source or retain appropriately skilled staff;

 ■ Portfolio company failure directly impacts the Group’s value and 

profitability.

 ■ At any time, a large proportion of the Group’s portfolio value may 
be accounted for by one, or very few, companies, which could 
exacerbate the impact of any impairment or failure of one or more of 
these companies. 

 ■ Cash realisations from the Group’s portfolio through trade sales and 

 ■ competing technologies may enter the market;

IPOs could vary significantly from year to year.

 ■ technology can be materially unproven and may fail; 

 ■ IP may be infringed, copied or stolen;

 ■ may be more susceptible to cyber-crime; and

 ■ other administrative, taxation or compliance issues may lead to 

company failure.

2 It may be difficult for the Group and its early-stage 

companies to attract capital.

The Group’s operations are reliant on capital markets, particularly those in 
the UK. As the Group’s operations, and the operations of the majority of 
its portfolio companies, are based in the UK, the financial and operational 
performance of the Group and particularly the ability of its portfolio 
companies to attract development capital is influenced by the general 
economic climate and trading conditions in the UK.

 ■ The UK’s recession has had (and may continue to have) an adverse 
effect on trading conditions and availability of capital in the UK, 
particularly for smaller businesses.

 ■ The success of those portfolio companies which require significant 
funding in the future may be influenced by the market’s appetite for 
investment in early stage companies, which may not be sufficient.

 ■ Failure of companies within the Group’s portfolio may make it more 
difficult for the Group or its spin-out companies to raise additional 
capital.

3

Universities or other research intensive institutions may 
terminate their partnerships or other collaborative 
relationships with the Group

The Group’s business, results of operations and prospects are at least 
partially dependent on competitive advantage gained from access to 
leading scientific research through partnerships and other collaborative 
arrangements with research intensive institutions and commercial 
partners such as Technikos LLP and Cambridge Innovation Capital. The 
Group may be unable to recreate these elements of its competitive 
advantage in other geographies in which it may seek to operate (such as 
the US).

 ■ Termination or non-renewal of arrangements through failure to 
perform obligations may result in the loss of exclusive rights. 

 ■ The loss of exclusive rights may limit the Group’s ability to secure 

attractive IP opportunities to commercialise. 

 ■ This could potentially have a material adverse effect on the Group’s 

long-term business, results of operations, performance and prospects. 

 ■ With several new entrants to our market, this may reduce our 

opportunities to create new spin-out businesses.

 ■ The Group’s staff have significant experience in 

sourcing, developing and growing early-stage 

technology companies to significant value, including 

systematic opportunity evaluation and business building 

methodologies. 

 ■ Members of the Group’s senior team often serve as  

non-executive directors or advisers to portfolio 

companies to help identify and remedy critical issues 

promptly.

 ■ Support on operational, legal and company secretarial 

matters is offered to minimise failures due to common 

administrative factors.

 ■ The Group has spin-out company holdings across 

different sectors to reduce the impact of a single 

company failure or sector demise.

 ■ The Group maintains significant cash balances and 

seeks to employ a capital efficient process deploying 

low levels of initial capital to enable identification and 

mitigation of potential failures at the earliest possible 

stage. 

opportunities.

companies. 

 ■ The Group has significant balance sheet and 

managed funds capital to deploy in attractive portfolio 

 ■ The Group operates a corporate finance function 

which carries out fundraising mandates for portfolio 

 ■ The Group maintains close relationships with a wide 

variety of co-investors that focus on companies at 

differing stages of development.

appropriate, enter into new and innovative partnerships 

and collaborations with research institutions.

 ■ The Group has been able to source opportunities 

through non-exclusive relationships and other sources. 

 ■ Members of the Group’s senior team work closely with 

partner institutions to ensure that each commercial 

relationship is mutually beneficial and productive.

 ■ The Group’s track record in IP commercialisation 

may make the Group a partner of choice for other 

institutions, acting as a barrier to entry to competitors.

 ■ The Group increased its rate 

 ■ Change in fair value 

of capital deployment into its 

of equity and debt 

portfolio in the year.

investments.

 ■ Some signs of increased 

 ■ Purchase of equity and 

liquidity and shareholder risk 

debt investments.

appetite observed on AIM.

 ■ Proceeds from the sale 

 ■ The Group raised £97.4m (net 

of equity investments.

of expenses) during the year, 

and increased cash reserves 

through the acquisition of 

Fusion IP.

 ■ In addition, the Group 

announced a further proposed 

financing to raise £128m 

(gross) in March 2015.

 ■ Economic conditions improved 

 ■ Change in fair value 

in the UK and increased 

liquidity and risk appetite in 

the equity capital markets has 

been observed, albeit from a 

low base.

 ■ The Group raised £97.4m 

(net of expenses) in February 

leading to an increase in capital 

deployment into the portfolio.

of equity and debt 

investments.

 ■ Total equity (“net 

assets”).

 ■ Profit/loss attributable 

to equity holders.

 ■ Pilot agreement signed with 

Princeton University; the Group 

now has agreements with three 

Ivy League US universities.

 ■ Oxford Chemistry contract 

expires in November 2015.

 ■ Deeper access to Fusion IP 

university partners. 

 ■ Commercialisation initiative 

with Department of Energy 

national labs in the US.

 ■ The Group continues to consider and, where 

 ■ PoP agreement extended with 

 ■ Number of new portfolio 

University of Manchester.

companies.

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
k
s
i
R
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

36

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Risk management

Were more than one of the risks to occur together, the overall impact on the Group may 
be compounded. A summary of the key risks affecting the Group and the steps taken to 
manage these is set out below. Further discussion of the key risks and uncertainties are 
given on pages 56 and 57 of the Corporate Governance Report.

Risk and description

Mitigation

Risk trend

Developments during the year

KPI

 ■ The Group’s staff have significant experience in 
sourcing, developing and growing early-stage 
technology companies to significant value, including 
systematic opportunity evaluation and business building 
methodologies. 

 ■ Members of the Group’s senior team often serve as  
non-executive directors or advisers to portfolio 
companies to help identify and remedy critical issues 
promptly.

 ■ Support on operational, legal and company secretarial 
matters is offered to minimise failures due to common 
administrative factors.

 ■ The Group has spin-out company holdings across 

different sectors to reduce the impact of a single 
company failure or sector demise.

 ■ The Group maintains significant cash balances and 

seeks to employ a capital efficient process deploying 
low levels of initial capital to enable identification and 
mitigation of potential failures at the earliest possible 
stage. 

 ■ The Group increased its rate 
of capital deployment into its 
portfolio in the year.

 ■ Change in fair value 
of equity and debt 
investments.

 ■ Some signs of increased 

 ■ Purchase of equity and 

debt investments.

 ■ Proceeds from the sale 
of equity investments.

liquidity and shareholder risk 
appetite observed on AIM.

 ■ The Group raised £97.4m (net 
of expenses) during the year, 
and increased cash reserves 
through the acquisition of 
Fusion IP.

 ■ In addition, the Group 

announced a further proposed 
financing to raise £128m 
(gross) in March 2015.

 ■ The Group has significant balance sheet and 

 ■ Economic conditions improved 

1 The returns and cash proceeds from the Group’s 

early-stage companies can be very uncertain

The following risks are typically associated with early-stage companies:

 ■ may not be able to secure later rounds of funding;

 ■ may not be able to source or retain appropriately skilled staff;

 ■ Portfolio company failure directly impacts the Group’s value and 

 ■ At any time, a large proportion of the Group’s portfolio value may 

be accounted for by one, or very few, companies, which could 

exacerbate the impact of any impairment or failure of one or more of 

these companies. 

 ■ Cash realisations from the Group’s portfolio through trade sales and 

 ■ competing technologies may enter the market;

IPOs could vary significantly from year to year.

Impact

profitability.

 ■ technology can be materially unproven and may fail; 

 ■ IP may be infringed, copied or stolen;

 ■ may be more susceptible to cyber-crime; and

 ■ other administrative, taxation or compliance issues may lead to 

company failure.

2 It may be difficult for the Group and its early-stage 

companies to attract capital.

 ■ The UK’s recession has had (and may continue to have) an adverse 

effect on trading conditions and availability of capital in the UK, 

particularly for smaller businesses.

The Group’s operations are reliant on capital markets, particularly those in 

 ■ The success of those portfolio companies which require significant 

the UK. As the Group’s operations, and the operations of the majority of 

its portfolio companies, are based in the UK, the financial and operational 

performance of the Group and particularly the ability of its portfolio 

companies to attract development capital is influenced by the general 

economic climate and trading conditions in the UK.

funding in the future may be influenced by the market’s appetite for 

investment in early stage companies, which may not be sufficient.

 ■ Failure of companies within the Group’s portfolio may make it more 

difficult for the Group or its spin-out companies to raise additional 

capital.

3

Universities or other research intensive institutions may 

terminate their partnerships or other collaborative 

relationships with the Group

 ■ Termination or non-renewal of arrangements through failure to 

perform obligations may result in the loss of exclusive rights. 

 ■ The loss of exclusive rights may limit the Group’s ability to secure 

attractive IP opportunities to commercialise. 

The Group’s business, results of operations and prospects are at least 

 ■ This could potentially have a material adverse effect on the Group’s 

partially dependent on competitive advantage gained from access to 

long-term business, results of operations, performance and prospects. 

 ■ With several new entrants to our market, this may reduce our 

opportunities to create new spin-out businesses.

leading scientific research through partnerships and other collaborative 

arrangements with research intensive institutions and commercial 

partners such as Technikos LLP and Cambridge Innovation Capital. The 

Group may be unable to recreate these elements of its competitive 

advantage in other geographies in which it may seek to operate (such as 

the US).

managed funds capital to deploy in attractive portfolio 
opportunities.

 ■ The Group operates a corporate finance function 

which carries out fundraising mandates for portfolio 
companies. 

 ■ The Group maintains close relationships with a wide 
variety of co-investors that focus on companies at 
differing stages of development.

 ■ The Group continues to consider and, where 

appropriate, enter into new and innovative partnerships 
and collaborations with research institutions.

 ■ The Group has been able to source opportunities 

through non-exclusive relationships and other sources. 

 ■ Members of the Group’s senior team work closely with 
partner institutions to ensure that each commercial 
relationship is mutually beneficial and productive.

 ■ The Group’s track record in IP commercialisation 

may make the Group a partner of choice for other 
institutions, acting as a barrier to entry to competitors.

in the UK and increased 
liquidity and risk appetite in 
the equity capital markets has 
been observed, albeit from a 
low base.

 ■ The Group raised £97.4m 

(net of expenses) in February 
leading to an increase in capital 
deployment into the portfolio.

 ■ Change in fair value 
of equity and debt 
investments.

 ■ Total equity (“net 

assets”).

 ■ Profit/loss attributable 
to equity holders.

 ■ PoP agreement extended with 
University of Manchester.

 ■ Number of new portfolio 

companies.

 ■ Pilot agreement signed with 

Princeton University; the Group 
now has agreements with three 
Ivy League US universities.

 ■ Oxford Chemistry contract 
expires in November 2015.

 ■ Deeper access to Fusion IP 

university partners. 

 ■ Commercialisation initiative 
with Department of Energy 
national labs in the US.

Key:

Increase

Decrease

No change

37

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comRisk management
continued

Mitigation

regularly.

 ■ The Group carries out regular market comparisons for 

staff and executive remuneration.

 ■ The Group seeks to offer a balanced incentive package 

comprising a mix of salary, benefits, performance-

based long-term incentives and benefits such as flexible 

working and salary sacrifice arrangements.

 ■ The long-term incentives for all senior staff are in the 

form of shares in the Group and all executives are 

shareholders in the business.

 ■ The Group encourages staff development and inclusion 

through coaching and mentoring.

to dedicate resources 

to remuneration and 

incentivisation.

 ■ Staff base increased through 

acquisition of Fusion IP. 

 ■ Staff attrition remained low 

and the Group recruited 13 

new members to the team 

excluding staff joining from 

Fusion IP. Approximately 40% 

of staff have been with the 

Company for at least five years.

 ■ Deepening of sector expertise 

and increased autonomy 

through divisional approach.

emphasised their ongoing 

support for scientific research 

with UK funding ring-fenced 

to 2021.

Risk and description

Impact

Risk trend

Developments during the year

KPI

 ■ Loss of key executives and employees of the Group or an inability to 
attract, retain and integrate appropriately skilled and experienced staff 
could have an adverse effect on the Group’s competitive advantage, 
business, financial condition, operational results and/or future 
prospects.

 ■ Senior team succession plans are in place and updated 

 ■ The Group continues 

 ■ Total equity (“net assets”)

 ■ Number of new portfolio 

companies 

 ■ Changes could result in universities and research institutions no longer 

 ■ University partners are incentivised to protect their IP for 

 ■ Ongoing focus on regulatory 

 ■ Total equity (“net assets”).

being able to own, exploit or protect intellectual property.

 ■ Changes in government policy or legislation may make it unattractive 
for research academics to participate in the commercialisation of the 
IP that they create. 

 ■ Changes to tax legislation or the nature of the Group’s activities, in 
particular in relation to the substantial shareholder exemption, may 
adversely affect the Group’s tax position and accordingly its value and 
operations.

 ■ The Group operates an FCA-authorised subsidiary and regulatory 

changes or breaches could ultimately lead to withdrawal of regulatory 
permissions, loss of fund management contracts, reputational damage 
or fines.

exploitation as the partnership agreements share returns 

between universities, academic founders and the Group. 

compliance including third 

party reviews.

 ■ The Group’s university partners also maintain close links 

 ■ UK and US Governments have 

with the government to manage their position with 

respect to future legislative changes.

 ■ The Group utilises professional advisers as appropriate to 

support its monitoring of, and response to changes in, 

tax or other legislation. 

 ■ The Group has internal policies and procedures to 

ensure its compliance with applicable FCA regulations 

and these are subject to external review.

4

The Group may lose key personnel or fail to attract and 
integrate new personnel

The industry in which the Group operates is a specialised area and the 
Group requires highly qualified and experienced employees. There is a 
risk that the Group’s employees could be approached and solicited by 
competitors or other technology-based companies and organisations, 
or could otherwise choose to leave the Group. Given the relatively small 
size of the Group, its operations are reliant on a small number of key 
individuals. Scaling the team, particularly into foreign jurisdictions such as 
the US, presents an additional potential risk.

5

There may be changes to, or impacts from, legislation, 
government policy and regulation

There may be unforeseen changes in, or impacts from, government 
policy, regulation or legislation (including taxation legislation). This could 
include changes to funding levels or to the terms upon which public 
moneys are made available to universities and research institutions and 
the ownership of any resulting intellectual property.

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
k
s
i
R
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

38

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Strategic Report Risk management

Risk and description

Impact

Mitigation

Risk trend

Developments during the year

KPI

The Group may lose key personnel or fail to attract and 

4

integrate new personnel

The industry in which the Group operates is a specialised area and the 

Group requires highly qualified and experienced employees. There is a 

risk that the Group’s employees could be approached and solicited by 

competitors or other technology-based companies and organisations, 

or could otherwise choose to leave the Group. Given the relatively small 

size of the Group, its operations are reliant on a small number of key 

individuals. Scaling the team, particularly into foreign jurisdictions such as 

the US, presents an additional potential risk.

 ■ Loss of key executives and employees of the Group or an inability to 

attract, retain and integrate appropriately skilled and experienced staff 

could have an adverse effect on the Group’s competitive advantage, 

business, financial condition, operational results and/or future 

prospects.

There may be changes to, or impacts from, legislation, 

5

government policy and regulation

 ■ Changes could result in universities and research institutions no longer 

being able to own, exploit or protect intellectual property.

 ■ Changes in government policy or legislation may make it unattractive 

for research academics to participate in the commercialisation of the 

There may be unforeseen changes in, or impacts from, government 

policy, regulation or legislation (including taxation legislation). This could 

IP that they create. 

include changes to funding levels or to the terms upon which public 

moneys are made available to universities and research institutions and 

the ownership of any resulting intellectual property.

 ■ Changes to tax legislation or the nature of the Group’s activities, in 

particular in relation to the substantial shareholder exemption, may 

adversely affect the Group’s tax position and accordingly its value and 

 ■ The Group operates an FCA-authorised subsidiary and regulatory 

changes or breaches could ultimately lead to withdrawal of regulatory 

permissions, loss of fund management contracts, reputational damage 

operations.

or fines.

 ■ Senior team succession plans are in place and updated 

regularly.

 ■ The Group carries out regular market comparisons for 

staff and executive remuneration.

 ■ The Group seeks to offer a balanced incentive package 
comprising a mix of salary, benefits, performance-
based long-term incentives and benefits such as flexible 
working and salary sacrifice arrangements.

 ■ The long-term incentives for all senior staff are in the 
form of shares in the Group and all executives are 
shareholders in the business.

 ■ The Group encourages staff development and inclusion 

through coaching and mentoring.

 ■ University partners are incentivised to protect their IP for 
exploitation as the partnership agreements share returns 
between universities, academic founders and the Group. 

 ■ The Group’s university partners also maintain close links 
with the government to manage their position with 
respect to future legislative changes.

 ■ The Group utilises professional advisers as appropriate to 
support its monitoring of, and response to changes in, 
tax or other legislation. 

 ■ The Group has internal policies and procedures to 

ensure its compliance with applicable FCA regulations 
and these are subject to external review.

 ■ Total equity (“net assets”)

 ■ Number of new portfolio 

companies 

 ■ Total equity (“net assets”).

 ■ The Group continues 
to dedicate resources 
to remuneration and 
incentivisation.

 ■ Staff base increased through 
acquisition of Fusion IP. 

 ■ Staff attrition remained low 
and the Group recruited 13 
new members to the team 
excluding staff joining from 
Fusion IP. Approximately 40% 
of staff have been with the 
Company for at least five years.

 ■ Deepening of sector expertise 
and increased autonomy 
through divisional approach.

 ■ Ongoing focus on regulatory 
compliance including third 
party reviews.

 ■ UK and US Governments have 
emphasised their ongoing 
support for scientific research 
with UK funding ring-fenced 
to 2021.

Key:

Increase

Decrease

No change

39

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comBuilding a sustainable business

Our values: 
•	 Passionate
•	 Pioneering
•	 Principled

IP Group aims to conduct its business 
in a socially responsible manner, to 
contribute to the communities in which 
it operates and to respect the needs of 
its employees and all of its stakeholders.

The Group is committed to growing 
the business while ensuring a safe 
environment for employees as well as 
minimising the overall impact on the 
environment.

IP Group endeavours to conduct its 
business in accordance with established 
best practice, to be a responsible 
employer and to adopt values and 
standards designed to help guide staff in 
their conduct and business relationships. 

Greg Smith  Chief Financial Officer

Our business ethics and  
social responsibility
Our goal is to build a sustainable and viable business. As part of 
that, the Group seeks to conduct all of its operating and business 
activities in an honest, ethical and socially responsible manner 
and these values underpin our business model and strategy. We 
are committed to acting professionally, fairly and with integrity 
in all our business dealings and relationships with consideration 
for the needs of all of our stakeholders which include university 
partners, investors, suppliers, employees, and the businesses in 
which the Group has holdings. 

IP Group pioneered the concept of the long-term partnership 
model with UK universities and now has arrangements covering 15 
of the UK’s leading universities as well as pilot schemes with three 
of the US’s Ivy League universities. The Group seeks to ensure that 
these partnerships are mutually beneficial and maintains an open 
two-way dialogue as it seeks to identify exciting opportunities. We 
believe that our approach to providing executive and administrative 
support, where appropriate, to portfolio companies gives their 
founders the best possible chance of building a successful 
business. Our support of early-stage businesses demonstrates our 
alignment with government initiatives in science and innovation 
and contributes to employment growth in the communities 
in which our portfolio companies operate. In addition to the 
support they receive from the Group, our portfolio businesses 
often seek funding from other sources, both public (such as 
government-backed grant funding) and private (from sources 
ranging from angel investors and small privately-owned funds 
to large institutional investors), and the Group will often assist in 
gaining access to this financial capital. The Group complies with all 
applicable legislation in this respect and communicates with its  
co-investors in an appropriate and transparent manner. As a 
publicly traded entity, IP Group actively seeks to engage and 
maintain an open dialogue with its private and institutional 
shareholders through its investor relations programme.

Although the adverse social and environmental impact of the 
Group’s day-to-day activities is relatively limited, we do recognise 
that the more significant impact occurs indirectly through 
the nature and operations of the companies that we choose 
to support with financial and human capital. Our portfolio 
companies, which are primarily focused on the biotechnology, 
technology, healthcare and clean technology sectors, are 
developing solutions to some of the most significant social, 
environmental and health challenges faced in the world today. 

l

s
s
e
n
i
s
u
b
e
b
a
n
a
t
s
u
s
a
g
n
d

i

i

l
i

u
B
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

40

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Building a sustainable business

IP Group employees cycled from 
London to Paris in two days to raise 
money for Teach First and PACE

While the Group is pleased to support these world-changing 
innovations, it recognises the importance of ensuring that the 
businesses it establishes and nurtures comply with all applicable 
environmental, ethical and social legislation. IP Group’s direct 
involvement in its portfolio companies allows greater scope to 
engage with the management teams of these companies and 
guide them on these matters.

The Group works with a variety of suppliers and seeks to ensure 
that there is diversity in the supply chain, working with SMEs as well 
as larger organisations. When selecting a supplier, we aim to ensure 
that the procurement process is clear and that all parties have equal 
access to information. Where possible we work with local suppliers 
therefore impacting positively on the communities where we 
operate. The Group is a signatory to the Prompt Payment Code. 

The Group seeks to operate as a responsible employer and has 
adopted standards which promote corporate values designed 
to help and guide employees in their conduct and business 
relationships. The Group seeks to comply with all laws, regulations 
and rules applicable to its business and to conduct the business 
in line with applicable established best practice. We take a zero 
tolerance approach to bribery and corruption and implement 
and enforce effective systems to counter bribery. The Group is 
bound by the laws of the UK, including the Bribery Act 2010, and 
has implemented policies and procedures based on such laws. 
All employees who are involved with the regulated business of 
managing investment transactions receive compliance and  
anti-money laundering training, with periodic refresher courses.

Employee diversity and  
employment policies
The Group operates an equal opportunity policy in the selection, 
training, career development and promotion of employees, 
regardless of age, gender, sexual orientation, ethnic origin, 
religion and whether disabled or otherwise. For the year ended 
31 December 2014, the Group employed an average of 49 
employees and five non-executive directors, and a breakdown 
of staff by gender can be seen in the table above right. IP Group 
supports the rights of all people as set out in the UN Universal 
Declaration of Human Rights and ensures that all transactions 
the Group enters into uphold these principles.

Breakdown of staff by gender as at date of report

Total Staff: 59 (excl. NEDs)

Staff

Executive Committee

Board of Directors

Health and Safety

Female

48%

29%

11%

Male

52%

71%

89%

Staff and management at all levels are responsible for the 
promotion of, and adherence to, health and safety measures 
in the workplace. The Chief Operating Officer has overall 
responsibility for the implementation of the Group’s health and 
safety policies and procedures. The primary purpose of the 
Group’s health and safety policy is to enable all members of 
the Group’s staff to go about their everyday business at work in 
the expectation that they can do so safely and without risk to 
their health. During the years ended 31 December 2014 and 31 
December 2013, no reportable accidents occurred under UK 
Health and Safety regulations.

Copies of the Group’s policies in relation to equal opportunities 
and diversity, health and safety and anti-corruption and bribery 
can be found on the Group’s website: www.ipgroupplc.com. 

Sourcing and retaining talent
The Group operates in a specialised area of industry and therefore the 
Group’s ability to attract and retain highly qualified and experienced 
employees is considered to be fundamental to its success. We  
recruit from a variety of sources. Many of our employees have a  
deep scientific background, professional qualifications and/or  
have extensive industry experience. Once we have recruited highly 
talented members of staff, it is important that we retain them. We 
achieve this by providing a dynamic and entrepreneurial environment 
in which our employees are able to develop their skills – usually 
through work-based learning with senior members of staff acting 
as coaches and mentors – and where knowledge-sharing is 
encouraged. Regular all-staff update meetings enable employees to 
receive an update on company progress and objectives. 

In addition to providing an attractive work environment, the 
Group also recognises the requirement for staff to be rewarded 
via appropriate remuneration packages. The Group seeks to offer 
a balanced incentive package comprising a mix of salary, benefits 
and performance-based long-term incentives as well as flexible 
working arrangements. Regular market comparisons are carried 
out in this respect.

41

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comBuilding a sustainable business
continued

During the year, the Group held a series of workshops in which 
staff were invited to give feedback on their view of the Company. 
Overall, employees stated that they were proud to work for IP 
Group and believed in the Company’s approach to building 
sustainable businesses, which are producing new technologies 
to solve various social and environmental issues. Employees 
highlighted the working environment, work/life balance and 
celebrating our successes as areas for improvement and the 
Directors are considering how these may be addressed. The 
Group’s success in retaining employees is reflected in its low staff 
attrition rate and approximately 40% of our employees having 
been with the Company for five years or more.

Operating in an environmentally 
responsible manner 
IP Group’s operations are office-based, with 59 employees in 
five main locations in the UK and shared office space in the US; 
therefore, we consider that the direct environmental impact of 
our employees is relatively low. However, we firmly recognise 
our responsibility to ensure that the business operates in an 
environmentally responsible and sustainable manner. Employees 
are encouraged to reduce their impact on the environment by 
hosting meetings via video conference where possible, thereby 
only engaging in business travel when necessary, using public 
transport and by minimising the usage of paper. Recycling 
facilities are provided in our offices. While the Board as a whole 
has primary responsibility for environmental issues, it has allocated 
day-to-day responsibility for the review of environmental and 
social issues to the Chief Financial Officer, Greg Smith.

This section includes our mandatory reporting of greenhouse gas 
emissions, as well as wider details on the Group’s environmental 
impact. The reporting period for emissions and waste production 
is the same as the Group’s fiscal year.

Organisation boundary and scope  
of emissions
The section below includes our mandatory reporting of 
greenhouse gas emissions. The reporting period is the same 
as the Group’s financial year. We have reported on all of the 
emission sources required under the Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic Report and Directors’ Reports) Regulations 2013. These 
sources fall within our consolidated financial statements. 

An operational control approach has been used in order to define 
our organisational boundary. This is the basis for determining the 
Scope 1 and 2 emissions for which the Group is responsible. 

For the avoidance of doubt, this excludes any emissions from 
our portfolio companies. Management believes the approach 
taken best captures the emissions for which the Group is directly 
responsible and over which it has control. 

Methodology
As in 2013, the Group employed the services of specialist adviser, 
Verco, to quantify the GHG emissions associated with the 
Group’s operations.

The following methodology was applied by Verco in the 
preparation and presentation of this data:

 ■ the Greenhouse Gas Protocol published by the World 

Business Council for Sustainable Development and the World 
Resources Institute (the “WBCSD/WRI GHG Protocol”); 

 ■ application of Defra emission factors to the Group’s activities 

to calculate GHG emissions;

 ■ inclusion of all the applicable Kyoto gases, expressed in 

carbon dioxide equivalents, or CO2e;

 ■ presentation of gross emissions as the Group does not 

purchase carbon credits (or equivalents). 

Intensity ratio
As well as reporting the absolute emissions, the Group’s GHG 
emissions are reported opposite on the metric of tonnes per 
square metre of occupied office space. This is considered the 
most appropriate metric given that the majority of emissions result 
from the operation of the Group’s offices and the day-to-day 
activities of the employees. In 2013, the Group also reported on 
metric tonnes of CO2e per employee. The management team has 
decided that this is no longer an appropriate metric, as there is no 
significant relationship between the number of employees and 
carbon efficiency.

Case study:

Reaching out to 
young people

Four students were shortlisted for 
a telephone interview and two 
were subsequently selected for 
work experience.

The two successful students 
joined the team in London 
for a week, spending time 
with different departments 
and meeting a wide range of 
colleagues. A day was also spent 
at Retroscreen Virology, one of 
IP Group’s portfolio companies, 
and the students visited the BBC 
Television Centre for a tour of 
the buildings to find out what 
life in communications might 
be like. Feedback from both the 
students and IP Group’s staff 
was positive and the Group 
looks forward to running future 
programmes of this nature.

Career Ready is a national 
charity which links schools and 
colleges with employers to help 
prepare young people for the 
world of work. Career Ready 
students are often from urban 
areas of social need. 

During the autumn half-term 
holiday of 2014, the Group 
worked with Career Ready to 
run a pilot work experience 
programme in London for sixth 
form students who might not 
normally get to experience 
working life in the city. 

At the start of the programme, 
a selection of Career Ready 
students were invited to an open 
morning and a presentation to 
learn about what IP Group does 
and some of the companies the 
Group is involved with developing. 
Following the open morning, the 
students were invited to apply for 
work experience by sending a 
cover letter and CV. 

l

s
s
e
n
i
s
u
b
e
b
a
n
a
t
s
u
s
a
g
n
d

i

i

l
i

u
B
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

42

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report Building a sustainable business

Target and baselines
Given the comparatively low GHG impact of the Group’s operations, the Group’s objective is to maintain or reduce its GHG per 
square metre of office space each year and will report each year whether it has been successful in this regard. 

For 2014, the intensity metric has increased from 0.11 tCO2e per m2 to 0.13 tCO2e per m2. This is primarily due to the increased energy 
intensity associated with newly occupied office space in Sheffield. If like-for-like premises across the two periods are considered only, 
the performance for 2014 is 0.12 tCO2e per m2.

GHG emissions

Scope 11

Scope 22

Subtotal

Scope 33 

Total GHG emissions 

2014 
Tonnes
CO2e

6.9

103.9

110.8

177.6

288.4

20135
Tonnes 
CO2e

6.7

75.1

81.8

146.8

228.6

20144
Tonnes 
CO2e 
per m2

20135
Tonnes
CO2e
per m2

Waste production

0.01

Landfill waste

0.10

Recycled waste

2014 
Tonnes

20135
Tonnes

4.5

1.8

4.4

1.9

0.11

0.19

0.30

Total Waste

6.3

6.3

0.01

0.13

0.13

0.21

0.34

1. 

Scope 1 being emissions from the Group’s combustion of fuel and operation of facilities.

2.  Scope 2 being electricity, heat, steam and cooling purchased for the Group’s own use.

3. 

Scope 3 being emissions which the Group is not directly responsible for, but arise as a by-product of its operation.

4.  Occupied office space: 831m2

5.  2013 emissions have been restated to correct a calculation error made by Verco in the prior year. The variance was primarily associated with scope 3 emissions, primarily 

that the carbon factor for Business Air Travel had been incorrectly applied. The Group’s GHG reporting and review procedures have now been amended to ensure the figures 
provided by Verco are subject to a more robust review.

Community engagement
The Group seeks to have a positive impact on the communities 
in which it operates and one of the ways in which it achieves 
this is through charitable support at both a Group level and by 
staff. The Group aims to donate up to 1% of the previous year’s 
realised profits to one or more charities which have a particular 
relevance to IP Group’s activities or to members of our team. The 
Group’s chosen charities in 2014 were Teach First, which trains 
and supports committed individuals to become inspirational 
classroom leaders in low-income communities, and PACE, a 
charity that transforms the lives of children and young people 
with motor disorders, such as cerebral palsy. Further details 
of the activities of these charities are set out on the Group’s 
website: www.ipgroupplc.com.

In 2014, IP Group employees raised a total of £13,500 for charity 
through various activities which included the sponsorship of 14 
employees cycling from London to Paris in two days. In line with 
its stated policy, the Group donated an additional £27,500.

For the first time, in 2014, the Group partnered with Career 
Ready, a UK national charity which links schools and colleges 
with employers to help prepare young people for the world of 
work, and invited two sixth form students to take part in one 
week’s work experience with the Group. See case study opposite.

Breakdown of emissions by scope

2%

60%

38%

Scope 1       Scope 2       Scope 3

Board approval

The Strategic Report, as set out on pages 01 to 43,  
has been approved by the Board.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Dr Bruce Smith 
Chairman
9 March 2015

43

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com  
Develop

To build and maintain a pipeline of compelling  
intellectual property-based opportunities

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Heading OneOur Governance

Overview

Board of Directors 

Corporate Governance 

Committee Reports

Directors’ Remuneration Report  

Report of the Audit Committee 

Other Statutory

Directors’ report 

Statement of Directors’  
Responsibilities 

46

48

58

75

79

81

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Board of Directors

Dr Bruce Smith, CBE
Non-executive Chairman

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

Mike Townend
Chief Investment Officer

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

David Baynes
Chief Operating Officer

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
3 September 20071

Effective date of current 
service contract
20 January 2005

Effective date of current 
service contract
5 March 2007

Effective date of current 
service contract
2 June 2011

Effective date of current 
service contract
20 March 2014

Age
75

Independent
N/A2

Tenure
12 years

Age
53

Independent
No

Tenure
10 years 

Age
52

Independent
No

Tenure
8 years

Age
36

Independent
No

Tenure
3 years 

Age
51

Independent
No

Tenure
1 year

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Founder of Techtran 
Group, 7 years as partner at 
KPMG, FCA 20+ years 

Current external 
appointments3
Non-executive Chairman 
Proactis Holdings plc

Committee memberships
None

Experience 
17+ years equity capital 
markets experience at 
Lehman Brothers and 
Donaldson, Lufkin and 
Jenrette

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
None

Experience 
KPMG background,  
FCA 10+ years

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
None

Experience 
10 years as CEO at Fusion 
IP plc, previous experience 
taking companies from 
start-up to full listing on the 
London Stock Exchange

Current external 
appointments3
Non-executive Director 
Arthurian Life Sciences 
Limited

Committee memberships
None 

Experience 
Founder of Smith System 
Engineering Ltd. Fellow 
of Royal Academy of 
Engineering, Institution 
of Engineering and 
Technology and Institute 
of Physics, Domus Fellow 
of St Catherine’s College, 
Oxford

Current external 
appointments3
Chairman of the Council of 
Smith Institute for Industrial 
Mathematics and System 
Engineering

Committee memberships
Nomination (chair)

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

46

1.  Refers to current appointment. Dr Smith was first appointed to the Group’s Board on  

4 September 2003.

2.  Dr Smith was considered by the Board to be independent on appointment.

3.  Excludes appointments to Group portfolio company boards.

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

Mike Humphrey
Senior Independent 
Director

Jonathan Brooks
Non-executive Director

Doug Liversidge, CBE
Non-executive Director

Professor Lynn 
Gladden, CBE
Non-executive Director

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
14 October 2011

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
31 August 2011

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
20 March 2014

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
26 March 2014

Age
63

Independent
Yes

Tenure
3 years 

Age
58

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
3 years 

Age
78

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
1 year

Age
53

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
1 year

Term of office
3 years, 3 months’ notice

Term of office
3 years, 3 months’ notice 

Term of office
3 years, 3 months’ notice

Term of office
3 years, 3 months’ notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Formerly 40+ years at 
Croda plc including  
13 years as CEO

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration (chair)

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Formerly CFO ARM 
Holdings plc, 20+ years 
technology sector 
experience, FCMA

Current external 
appointments3
Audit Committee Chairman 
Aveva plc 

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit (chair) 
and Remuneration

Experience 
10 years as Chairman at 
Fusion IP plc, 20+ years at 
British Steel

Current external 
appointments3
Chairman of Surgical 
Innovations plc

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration

Experience 
Fellow of the Royal 
Society, Royal Academy of 
Engineering, Institution of 
Chemical Engineers, Royal 
Society of Chemistry and 
Institute of Physics

Current external 
appointments3
Pro-Vice-Chancellor for 
Research, University of 
Cambridge. Shell Professor 
of Chemical Engineering. 
Director, Cambridge 
Enterprise Ltd

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration

47

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comCorporate Governance

A year of progress:  
evolving our  
organisational structure 

2014 has been a busy year for IP Group 
with its UK operations seeing significant 
developments and progress being made 
in its nascent US operations.

The Board remains focused on the 
execution of the Group’s strategy, 
working with its partners to  
develop outstanding intellectual 
property-based businesses, and, in 
doing so, it continues to recognise 
the importance of a strong focus on 
corporate governance. Corporate 
governance at IP Group is more 
than just compliance with rules and 
regulations. It is an integral part of all 
of our activities, especially those of the 
Board and its committees.

The Board is accountable to the Company’s 
shareholders for good governance and this report, 
together with the Reports of the Remuneration, 
Nomination and Audit Committees of the Board 
describes our detailed approach to corporate 
governance and further information on the key 
developments in these areas during the year.

The Board looks forward to being able to discuss 
these matters with our shareholders at the Group’s 
forthcoming AGM or indeed at any other point 
during the year.

Dr Bruce Smith  Chairman

Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code
The Directors are committed to a high standard of corporate 
governance and to compliance with the best practice of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”). The version of the 
Code applicable to the twelve months ended 31 December 2014 
is that issued by the Financial Reporting Council in September 
2012, and the Directors consider that the Company has been in 
compliance with all the provisions set out in that edition of the 
Code. The Code has been further revised in September 2014 for 
accounting periods beginning on or after 1 October 2014 and 
the Directors are working towards reporting compliance with its 
provisions in next year’s report.

Further explanation as to how the provisions set out in the Code 
have been applied by the Company is set out in the following 
statement, the Directors’ Remuneration Report, the Audit 
Committee Report and the Strategic Report.

The Board
Role and responsibilities of the Board 
The Board is responsible to shareholders for the overall 
management of the Group as a whole, providing entrepreneurial 
leadership within a framework of controls for assessing and 
managing risk; defining, challenging and interrogating the 
Group’s strategic aims and direction; maintaining the policy 
and decision-making framework in which such strategic aims 
are implemented; ensuring that the necessary financial and 
human resources are in place to meet strategic aims; monitoring 
performance against key financial and non-financial indicators; 
succession planning; overseeing the system of risk management; 
setting values and standards in governance matters and 
monitoring policies and performance on corporate social 
responsibility. The Directors are also responsible for promoting 
the long-term success of the Group, taking into account the 
interests of shareholders and other stakeholders including 
employees, suppliers, customers, partners, the community, 
the environment and society; for ensuring that obligations to 
shareholders and other stakeholders are understood and met; 
and in maintaining a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders. All 
Directors are equally accountable to the Company’s shareholders 
for the proper stewardship of its affairs and the long-term 
success of the Group.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

48

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

Nomination 
Committee

Audit
Committee

Board

Remuneration 
Committee

The responsibility of the Directors is collective, taking 
into account their respective roles as Executive Directors 
and Non-executive Directors. The Executive Directors are 
directly responsible for running the business operations, and 
developing and implementing strategy, and the Non-executive 
Directors are responsible for constructively challenging 
and contributing to proposals on strategy, scrutinising 
the performance of management, determining levels of 
remuneration and for succession planning for the Executive 
Directors. The Non-executive Directors must also satisfy 
themselves on the integrity of financial information and that 
financial controls and systems of risk management are robust.

The Board reviews strategic issues on a regular basis and 
exercises control over the performance of the Group by 
agreeing budgetary targets and monitoring performance 
against those targets. The Board has overall responsibility for 
the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management, 
as described on pages 56 and 57. Any decisions made by the 
Board on policies and strategy to be adopted by the Group, or 
changes to current policies and strategy, are made following 
presentations by the Executive Directors and a detailed 
process of review and challenge by the Board. Once made, 
the Executive Directors are fully empowered to implement 
those decisions.

Except for a formal schedule of matters, which are reserved for 
decision and approval by the Board, the Board has delegated the 
day-to-day management of the Group’s operations to a newly 
constituted (in June 2014) Executive Committee comprising 
the Chief Executive Officer, the other Executive Directors and 
three members of the senior management team: the Group’s 
Director of Strategy, the Group’s Head of Partnerships and the 
Group’s General Counsel and Company Secretary. The schedule 
of matters reserved for Board decision and approval are those 
significant to the Group as a whole due to their strategic, financial 
or reputational implications. This schedule was reviewed in detail 
in 2014 and supplemented as the Board considered appropriate, 
with a final amended schedule being adopted by the Board in 
August 2014. This schedule includes, without limitation, those 
matters set out in the box overleaf and the full schedule can be 
found within the Corporate Governance section of the Group’s 
website at www.ipgroupplc.com. The terms of reference for the 
Executive Committee were considered carefully by the Board, 
alongside the matters reserved for Board decision and approval, 
to ensure that they worked seamlessly together without overlap.

Chief 
Executive

Senior
Management
Team

In addition to the Executive Committee, the Board delegates 
specific responsibilities to certain additional committees 
that assist the Board in carrying out its functions and ensure 
independent oversight of internal control and risk management. 
The three principal Board Committees (Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination) play an essential role in supporting the Board in 
fulfilling its responsibilities and ensuring that the highest standards 
of corporate governance are maintained throughout the Group. 
Each committee has its own terms of reference which set out 
the specific matters for which delegated authority has been given 
by the Board. The current terms of reference for each of the 
Committees, which were updated in 2014, are fully compliant 
with the provisions of the Code and reflect best practice, were 
reviewed by the relevant committee throughout the year and no 
amendments were considered necessary. These will continue to 
be reviewed annually and updated where necessary. All of these 
are available on request from the Company Secretary or within 
the Corporate Governance section of the Group’s website at 
www.ipgroupplc.com. 

49

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comCorporate Governance
continued

Matters Reserved 
for the Board

 ■ Approval of the annual report and accounts and half-year results 

statement, accounting policies and procedures or any matter having a 
material impact on future financial performance of the Group.

 ■ Strategic acquisitions or disposals by the Group.

 ■ Major portfolio capital allocation decisions, being those in excess of 

£5m per investment.

 ■ The entry into by the Group of strategic partnerships and collaborations 

with universities and other research institutions.

 ■ Major disposals from the Group’s portfolio.

 ■ Approval and monitoring of the Group’s strategic aims and objectives. 

 ■ Approval of the annual budget.

 ■ Considering and, where appropriate, approving Directors’ conflicts of 

interest.

 ■ Approving Board appointments and removals and approving policies 

relating to Directors’ remuneration.

 ■ Approval of terms of reference and membership of Board committees.

 ■ Approval, subject to shareholder approval, of the appointment and 

remuneration of the auditors.

 ■ Approval of all circulars, prospectuses and other documents issued to 
shareholders governed by the FSA’s Listing Rules, Disclosure Rules or 
Transparency Rules or the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers.

 ■ Changes to the Group’s capital structure, the issue of any securities and 

material borrowing of the Group. 

 ■ The division of responsibility between the Chairman and the Chief 

Executive Officer.

 ■ Major changes in employee share schemes.

 ■ Material borrowings by the Group.

 ■ Litigation.

Available from the Company 
Secretary or on our 
corporate website

 www.ipgroupplc.com 

Board Committees

The terms of reference of each Committee establish its responsibilities and 
are available from the Company Secretary and on our corporate website: 
www.ipgroupplc.com.

Executive 
Committee

Day-to-day decisions are delegated to the Executive Committee, which 
operates under agreed terms of reference. These are available from the 
Company Secretary and on our corporate website: www.ipgroupplc.com.

Board size and composition
As at 31 December 2014, there were nine Directors on the Board: 
the Chairman, four Executive Directors and four Non-executive 
Directors. The biographies of all of these Directors are provided 
on pages 46 and 47. During the year, there were a number of 
changes to the Board as follows:

 ■ On 23 April 2014, Charles Winward stepped down from the 

Board as an Executive Director to pursue other opportunities; 
and

 ■ On 01 July 2014, Francis Carpenter stepped down as a  

Non-executive Director, following completion of his second 
three-year term of office. 

In addition, on 29 October 2014, Dr Bruce Smith announced 
his intention to step down from his position as Chairman of the 
Board and Director of the Company once a suitably qualified and 
experienced successor had been appointed. 

 ■ Professor Lynn Gladden CBE joined the Board as a  

Non-executive Director with effect from 26 March 2014;

 ■ Following successful completion of the acquisition by the 
Group of Fusion IP plc (“Fusion IP”) in March 2014, David 
Baynes, previously Fusion IP’s CEO, joined the Board as an 
Executive Director of the Company and Doug Liversidge, 
previously Fusion IP’s Chairman, joined the Board as an 
additional Non-executive Director. In April 2014, David 
Baynes was then appointed as Chief Operating Officer of the 
Company; 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

50

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

In light of all of these changes, the Nomination Committee and 
the Board undertook a review of the size and composition of 
the current Board, building on recent work by the Nomination 
Committee on succession planning. The conclusion of this 
process was that the Nomination Committee recommended 
to the Board that Mike Humphrey, the Group’s current Senior 
Independent Director, be appointed as Chairman with effect from 
24 March 2015, with Dr Smith stepping down from the Board on 
the same date. In addition, given the vacancy that will be left by Mr 
Humphrey, the Nomination Committee will seek to recommend at 
least one additional non-executive director for appointment during 
2015. Further detail on the process undertaken by the Nomination 
Committee in identifying a successor Chairman for the Group, 
including the identity of the third party executive search consultant 
engaged to assist in this process, is set out on pages 55 and 56.

An extract of the Group’s Policy relating to the terms of 
appointment and the remuneration of both executive and non-
executive directors is detailed in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report on pages 60 to 63.

In accordance with the Code, all Directors will submit themselves 
for annual re-election by shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting of the Company to be held on 12 May 2015. The 
Board recommends to shareholders the reappointment of all 
Directors retiring at the meeting and offering themselves for 
re-election on the basis that the annual Board evaluation and 
individual performance reviews demonstrated that they are all 
effective directors of the Company and continue to display the 
appropriate level of commitment in their respective roles. New 
directors may be appointed by the Board but their appointment 
is subject to election by shareholders at the first Annual General 
Meeting after their appointment. 

Diversity
The Board is committed to a culture that attracts and retains 
talented people to deliver outstanding performance and further 
enhance the success of the Company. In that culture, diversity 
across a range of criteria is valued. The Board recognises 
that diversity, in all its aspects, is key for introducing different 
perspectives into board debate and decision making. A genuinely 
diverse board comprises individuals with a range of personal 
attributes, perspectives, skills, knowledge, experiences and 
backgrounds, as well as representing differences in nationality, 
race and gender.

The Board agrees that gender remains an important aspect in 
creating an optimal board in terms of balance and composition. 
In identifying suitable candidates for anticipated Board 
appointments during 2015, the Nomination Committee will have 
due regard to the benefits of diversity and seek candidates from 
different genders and a range of backgrounds. It will, however, 
remain the Board’s policy to make any new appointments based 
on merit against objective criteria. The Nomination Committee 
gave due consideration through the year as to whether to set 
a target in relation to the number of women on the Board but, 
whilst it endorses Lord Davies’ recommendations, it did not 
consider it appropriate nor in the best interests of the Group to 

set either Board or Group-wide targets at this stage and prefers 
to continue to consider all aspects of diversity (including gender) 
when assessing the overall Board composition and in making 
new appointments as aforementioned. 

Although it does not have a target in relation to the number 
of women on the Board, the Company currently has one 
female director on its Board and will aim to maintain female 
representation on the Board at least at this current level and 
give due consideration to increasing the level when making the 
anticipated addition(s) to the Board through 2015. In addition, 
the terms of reference of the Nomination Committee include a 
requirement for the Nomination Committee to consider diversity, 
including gender, in evaluating the composition of the Board and 
in identifying suitable candidates for Board appointments. 

The Group’s commitment to diversity at the senior management 
level is also very strong and it actively works to increase the 
number of women in leadership positions within the Group. 
A breakdown of employee diversity showing the number 
of persons who were Directors of the Company and senior 
managers at the date of this report can be found on page 41. 

Non-executive Directors
The Non-executive Directors provide a wide range of skills and 
experience to the Group. They bring their own senior level of 
experience in each of their own fields, robust opinions and an 
independent judgement on issues of strategy, performance, 
risk and people through their contribution and are well placed 
to constructively challenge and scrutinise the performance of 
management at Board and Committee meetings. The Code 
sets out the circumstances that should be relevant to the 
Board in determining whether each non-executive director 
is independent. The Board considers non-executive director 
independence on an annual basis as part of each non-executive 
director’s performance evaluation. Having undertaken this review, 
and with due regard to provision B.1.1 of the Code, the Board has 
concluded this year that all of the Non-executive Directors are 
considered by the Board to be independent of management and 
free of any relationship or circumstance which could materially 
influence or interfere with, or affect, or appear to affect, the 
exercise of their independent judgement.

Since 2009, the Board’s policy has been to prohibit personal 
investments by the non-executive directors in any of the Group’s 
portfolio companies, whether new or existing. None of the 
Non-executive Directors presenting themselves for election or 
re-election at the AGM in 2015 will have holdings in any of the 
Group’s portfolio companies.

Non-executive directors are required to obtain the approval of 
the Chairman before taking on any further appointments and 
the Chairman requires the approval of the Board before adding 
to his commitments. In all cases, the directors must ensure 
that their external appointments do not involve excessive time 
commitment or cause a conflict of interest. 

51

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comCorporate Governance
continued

The roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
Dr Bruce Smith is the current Chairman. The division of 
responsibilities between the Chairman and the Chief Executive 
Officer is clearly established, set out in writing and agreed 
by the Board. The Chairman is responsible for the leadership 
and conduct of the Board, the conduct of the Group’s affairs 
and strategy and for ensuring effective communication with 
shareholders. The Chairman facilitates the full and effective 
contribution of non-executive directors at Board and Committee 
meetings, ensures that they are kept well informed and fosters 
a constructive relationship between the executive directors and 
non-executive directors. The Chairman also ensures that the 
membership of the Board is appropriate to the needs of the 
business and that the Board Committees carry out their duties, 
including reporting back to the Board following their meetings, 
either orally or in writing, at the next Board meeting depending 
on its proximity to the meeting of the relevant committee. 

The role of the Chief Executive Officer is to lead the delivery 
of the strategy and the executive management of the Group 
and its operating businesses. He is responsible, amongst other 
things, for the development and implementation of strategy and 
processes which enable the Group to meet the requirements 
of shareholders, for delivering the operating plans and budgets 
for the Group’s businesses, monitoring business performance 
against key performance indicators (KPIs), and reporting on these 
to the Board, and for providing the appropriate environment to 
recruit, engage, retain and develop the high quality personnel 
needed to deliver the Group’s strategy. 

Senior Independent Director
Mike Humphrey was the Senior Independent Director throughout 
2014. A key responsibility of the Senior Independent Director is 
to be available to shareholders in the event that they may feel 
it inappropriate to relay views through the Chairman or Chief 
Executive Officer. In addition, the Senior Independent Director 
serves as an intermediary between the rest of the Board and 
the Chairman, where necessary, and takes the lead when the 
Non-executive Directors assess the Chairman’s performance and 
when the appointment of a new Chairman is considered other 
than where the Senior Independent Director himself or herself 
wishes to be considered for the role, which was the case with Mr 
Humphrey (see pages 55 and 56 for further details in this regard). 
Further, the Senior Independent Director will lead the Board in 
their deliberations on any matters on which the Chairman is 
conflicted. 

In light of Mr Humphrey’s appointment to the role of Chairman 
with effect from 24 March 2015, the Board has approved the 
recommendation of the Nomination Committee for Doug 
Liversidge to be appointed as Senior Independent Director in Mr 
Humphrey’s place with effect from the same date. 

Board support
The Company Secretary is responsible to the Board for ensuring 
that Board procedures are followed, applicable rules and 
regulations are complied with and that the Board is advised on 
governance matters and relevant regulatory matters. All directors 
have access to the impartial advice and services of the Company 
Secretary. There is also an agreed procedure for directors to take 
independent professional advice at the Company’s expense. In 
accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, directors 
have been granted an indemnity issued by the Company to 
the extent permitted by law in respect of liabilities incurred as 
a result of their office. The indemnity would not provide any 
coverage where a director is proved to have acted fraudulently 
or dishonestly. A copy of the indemnity is available for inspection 
as required by the Companies Act 2006. The Company has also 
arranged appropriate insurance cover in respect of legal action 
against its directors and officers.

Board meetings and decisions
The Board meets regularly during the year as well as on an 
ad hoc basis, as required by business need. The Board had 
seven scheduled Board meetings in 2014. In addition to these 
scheduled Board meetings, the Board also had a day together in 
June 2014 devoted entirely to the Group’s strategic objectives. 
This provided an opportunity for all the Directors, and particularly 
the Non-executive Directors, to ensure the Group’s strategy is on 
course; to discuss medium and longer term strategic objectives, 
and the key drivers underpinning these; to review the Group’s 
KPIs; to analyse and challenge the Group’s objectives; and to 
review the Group’s risk framework and risk appetite, including 
considering the major risks facing the Group and its strategy 
and how to mitigate and/or monitor the same. In addition, the 
Chairman and the Non-executive Directors met without the 
presence of the Executive Directors twice during the year. 

The schedule of Board and Committee meetings each year is, so 
far as is possible, determined before the commencement of that 
year and all Directors or, if appropriate, all Committee members 
are expected to attend each meeting. Supplementary meetings 
of the Board and/or the Committees are held as and when 
necessary. In advance of each scheduled meeting, each member 
of the Board receives detailed Board packs, which include an 
agenda based upon the schedule of matters reserved for its 
approval along with appropriate reports and briefing papers. 
If a director is unable to attend a meeting due to exceptional 
circumstances, he or she will still receive the supporting 
papers and will usually discuss any matters he or she wishes 
to raise with the Chairman in advance of the meeting. The 
Chairman, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and 
Company Secretary work together to ensure that the Directors 
receive relevant information to enable them to discharge their 
duties and that such information is accurate, timely and clear. 
This information includes monthly management accounts 
containing analysis of performance against budget and other 
forecasts. Additional information is provided as appropriate or 
if requested. At each meeting, the Board receives information, 
reports and presentations from the Chief Executive Officer, the 
other Executive Directors and, by invitation, other members 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

52

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

Board and committee attendance
The following table shows the attendance of directors at meetings of the Board, Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees 
during the year:

Scheduled  
Board Meetings

Audit  
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination
Committee

Dr Bruce Smith

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

David Baynes1

Mike Humphrey

Jonathan Brooks

Doug Liversidge2

Prof. Lynn Gladden3

Francis Carpenter  4

Charles Winward 5

1.  David Baynes was appointed to the Board with effect from 20 March 2014.

2.  Doug Liversidge was appointed to the Board with effect from 20 March 2014  

and appointed to the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees from 01 July 2014.

3.  Prof Lynn Gladden was appointed to the Board with effect from 26 March 2014 

and appointed to the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees from 01 July 2014

4. 

Francis Carpenter stepped down from the Board with effect from 01 July 2014.

5.  Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014

Key:

Attended

Did not attend

53

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance
continued

of senior management or the Group’s divisional teams as 
required. This ensures that all Directors are aware of, and are in 
a position to monitor effectively, the overall performance of the 
Group, its development and implementation of strategy, and its 
management of risk. 

Any matter requiring a decision by the Board is supported by a 
paper analysing the relevant aspects of the proposal including 
costs, benefits, potential risks involved and proposed executive 
management action and recommendation.

The majority of Board meetings are held at the Group’s offices 
in London, which gives members of the Group’s divisional 
teams the opportunity to formally present to the Board on 
new spin-out opportunities or early-stage portfolio companies 
on which they are working. This assists the Board in gaining a 
deeper understanding of the breadth, stage of development and 
diversity of the Group’s portfolio. The Board also aims to have at 
least one of its scheduled meetings, or its annual strategy day, at 
either the Company’s offices in Leeds, Oxford, Sheffield, Cardiff 
or Newcastle or at the location of one of the Group’s partner 
universities in order to encourage further interaction with the 
Group’s stakeholders. Meetings between the Chairman and the 
Non-executive Directors, both with and without the presence of 
the Chief Executive Officer, are also held as the need arises. 

Directors’ conflicts of interest
Each director has a statutory duty under the Companies Act 
2006 (the “CA 2006”) to avoid a situation in which he or she 
has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts or 
may potentially conflict with the interests of the Company. This 
duty is in addition to the continuing duty that a director owes 
to the Company to disclose to the Board any transaction or 
arrangement under consideration by the Company in which he 
or she is interested. The Company’s Articles of Association permit 
the Board to authorise conflicts or potential conflicts of interest. 
The Board has established procedures for managing and, where 
appropriate, authorising any such conflicts or potential conflicts 
of interest. It is a recurring agenda item at all Board meetings 
and this gives the directors the opportunity to raise at the 
beginning of every Board meeting any actual of potential conflict 
of interests that they may have on the matters to be discussed, 
or to update the Board on any change to a previous conflict of 
interest already declared. In deciding whether to authorise any 
conflict, the directors must have regard to their general duties 
under the CA 2006 and their overriding obligation to act in a way 
they consider, in good faith, will be most likely to promote the 
Company’s success. In addition, the directors are able to impose 
limits or conditions when giving authorisation to a conflict or 
potential conflict of interest if they think this is appropriate. 
The authorisation of any conflict matter, and the terms of any 
authorisation, may be reviewed by the Board at any time. The 
Board believes that the procedures established to deal with 
conflicts of interest are operating effectively.

Induction, awareness and development
A comprehensive induction process is in place for new directors. 
The programme is tailored to the needs of each individual 
director and agreed with him or her so that he or she can gain 
a better understanding of the Group and its businesses. This will 

generally include an overview of the Group and its businesses, 
structure, functions and strategic aims; site visits to the Group’s 
head office in London and to one or more of its nationwide 
offices in Leeds, Oxford, Sheffield, Cardiff and Newcastle; and 
site visits to a number of the Group’s portfolio companies, 
including one or more within the Group’s top ten holdings 
(by value), which will include meeting with such companies’ 
management and a presentation from them on their businesses. 
In addition, the Company facilitates sessions as appropriate with 
the Group’s advisers, in particular its sponsor Numis Securities 
Limited, as well as with appropriate governances specialists, to 
ensure that any new directors are fully aware of and understand 
their responsibilities and obligations as a director of a FTSE 350 
company and of the governance framework within which they 
must operate. 

In order to ensure that directors continue to further their 
understanding of the issues facing the Group, the Chairman and 
Non-executive Directors are encouraged to continue to visit the 
Group’s offices other than the main corporate office in London, 
its portfolio companies and its partner universities. Through 2015, 
at least one of the Group’s Board meetings or its strategy day will 
be off-site to facilitate this. As detailed above, the Board is also 
exposed to the early-stage opportunities, in which the Group has 
invested, through presentations at Board meetings by relevant 
members of the Group’s staff. It is also intended that, through 
2015, other function heads (such as the heads of IP Exec, IP 
Impact, Communications and Business Support) will be given the 
opportunity to present to the Board in order to enhance the 
Board’s awareness of how the Group operates on a day-to-day 
basis and how such functions assist in the execution of the 
Group’s core strategy of systematically helping create, build and 
support outstanding intellectual property-based businesses.

As a further aspect of their ongoing development, each director 
also receives feedback on his or her performance following the 
Board’s performance evaluation in each year and, through the 
Company Secretary, access to relevant training and development 
opportunities, including those relevant to the Non-executive 
Directors’ membership on the Board’s Committees, is facilitated.

Board effectiveness and performance evaluation
A performance evaluation of the Board and its Committees is 
carried out annually to ensure that they continue to be effective 
and that each of the directors demonstrates commitment to his 
or her respective role and has sufficient time to meet his or her 
commitment to the Company. During the 2014 financial year, 
the Board assessed its own effectiveness through an internal 
Board evaluation process; this followed an internally facilitated 
evaluation for 2013 and an external evaluation for 2012. The 
2014 evaluation was led by the Chairman, assisted by the 
Company Secretary, and consisted of one-to-one discussions 
between the Chairman and each of the individual Directors 
covering the effectiveness of the Board as a whole, conduct of 
Board meetings; risk appetite; development of strategy; Board 
composition and member performance; and the performance of 
the Board’s Committees. This supplemented the detailed work 
that was carried out in the last quarter of 2014 by the Nomination 
Committee and the Board as a whole with the assistance of 
the Company Secretary and the Head of IP Exec, the Group’s 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

54

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

in-house executive search function, to closely analyse the 
composition of the Board in connection with the recruitment 
process for a new Chairman. That work focused on the current 
mix of skills, knowledge and experience on the Board as well as 
on identifying the areas to be strengthened or where additions 
are or will be required following the departure of Dr Bruce Smith 
as Chairman.

The Chairman subsequently reported the results of the review 
back to the full Board. Overall it was agreed that, whilst it had 
been a year of change in terms of the composition of the  
Board, the Board and its Committees continued to operate 
effectively throughout the period, both in terms of culture and 
decision-making. The experience of the Board members is seen 
as a key strength and it was noted that the most recently 
appointed members of the Board had integrated well and that 
the number of Board meetings was considered to be appropriate, 
with both the flow and availability of information between 
meetings supporting that position. It was also agreed that good 
progress had been made in the year against the action points 
identified in the 2013 Board evaluation, particularly as far as 
strategy planning and further definition of the short, medium and 
long term objectives of the Group were concerned. There are, 
however, always opportunities for improvement and, for the 
coming year, in addition to the further planned addition(s) to the 
Board’s composition, the Nomination Committee and the Board 
as a whole plan to focus on succession planning for the 
Executive Directors and senior management team and to 
continue to ensure that sufficient time is set aside to focus on 
strategy and the Board’s risk appetite. 

In addition to the above, the Non-executive Directors, led by 
the Senior Independent Director, appraised the Chairman’s 
performance following which the Senior Independent Director 
provided feedback to the Chairman. The performance of each of 
the Directors on the Board was reviewed by the Chairman and 
the operational performance of the other Executive Directors 
was reviewed by the Chief Executive Officer as part of the annual 
appraisal process. In addition to the aforementioned annual 
reviews, the performance of the Executive Directors is reviewed 
by the Board on an ongoing basis, as deemed necessary, in the 
absence of the Executive Director under review.

Committees of the Board
The composition of the three Committees of the Board and the 
attendance of the members throughout the year is set out in the 
diagram on page 49.

Remuneration and Audit Committees
Separate reports on the role, composition, responsibilities 
and operation of the Remuneration Committee and the Audit 
Committee are set out on pages 58 to 59 and pages 75 to 78 
respectively.

Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee leads the process for Board 
appointments and the re-election and succession of directors 
and the Chairman. Its key objective is to ensure that the Board 
comprises individuals with the necessary skills, knowledge and 

experience to ensure that the Board is effective in discharging 
its duties. It is responsible for making recommendations to 
the Board concerning the composition and skills of the Board 
including any changes considered necessary in the identification 
and nomination of new directors, the reappointment of existing 
directors and the appointment of members to the Board’s 
Committees. It also assesses the roles of the existing directors 
in office to ensure there continues to be a balanced Board 
in terms of skills, knowledge, experience and diversity. The 
Nomination Committee reviews the senior leadership needs 
of the Group which will enable it to compete effectively in the 
marketplace. The Nomination Committee also advises the Board 
on succession planning for executive director appointments 
although the Board as a whole is responsible for succession 
generally. 

The Committee is chaired by Dr Bruce Smith. Its other members, 
as at 31 December 2014, were Jonathan Brooks, Mike Humphrey, 
Professor Lynn Gladden and Douglas Liversidge, ensuring a 
majority of independent non-executive directors as prescribed 
by the Code. The Nomination Committee meets as and when 
required, or as requested by the Board, and met twice during 
2014. The decision of Dr Bruce Smith to step down from his 
position as Non-executive Chairman of the Board and director 
of the Company once a suitably qualified and experienced 
successor had been appointed, as announced on 29 October 
2014, catalysed a period of intense work by the Committee, in 
the final quarter of 2014 and the first month of 2015, to review 
in detail the structure, size and composition of the current 
Board. The attendance by each member of the Committee at 
the meetings during 2014 is set out on page 53. The Committee 
followed the following process in its search for a successor 
Chairman:

 ■ Mike Humphrey, as the Senior Independent Director, initially 
took charge of the process but, following his decision to put 
himself forward as a potential candidate, Jonathan Brooks, 
as the next most senior Non-executive Director, took over to 
lead the process with the other members of the Committee.

 ■ In the context of the Group’s strategy and the challenges likely 
to be faced by the Board in the near to medium term, the 
Committee evaluated each of the following in detail: (i) the 
balance of current skills, knowledge, experience and diversity 
(including gender) on the current Board; (ii) what skills and 
capabilities would be required of a new Chairperson 
candidate. This included identifying any skills, capabilities, 
areas of expertise and/or experience which were not already 
present, or were under-represented, on the current Board or 
which may result from the retirement of the current 
Chairman; and (iii) any other potential additional skills, 
capabilities and attributes which may be necessary or 
desirable on the Board to supplement the existing members 
and/or to replace Mike Humphrey in the event that the 
decision was made to appoint him as replacement Chairman. 
The Committee was assisted in its evaluation by the Company 
Secretary and the Head of IP Exec, the Group’s in-house 
executive search function.

55

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comCorporate Governance
continued

 ■ The Committee appointed an external recruitment 
consultancy, Spencer Stuart (“SS”), to assist with the 
identification of appropriate candidates with the requisite 
skills, knowledge and experience for the position. SS is an 
international executive search consulting firm, which has a 
strong Board practice and has no other connection with the 
Group other than this engagement.

 ■ SS compiled a longlist, which the Committee narrowed down 
to a shortlist, of preferred external candidates, which was also 
shared with the Chief Executive Officer. Following a rigorous 
assessment of all the available candidates, the Committee 
concluded that, given Mike Humphrey’s experience both 
internationally and with institutional investors, as well as the 
benefits of continuity given the other changes in the Board 
structure through 2014, he should be recommended to 
the Board as having met the criteria required to succeed Dr 
Bruce Smith as Chairman, as well as having sufficient time to 
discharge the requirements of the role. The Board approved 
this recommendation and Mr Humphrey will formally succeed 
Dr Smith at the conclusion of the Board meeting on 24 March 
2015. 

 ■ In light of the vacancy left by Mr Humphrey’s appointment 
to Chairman, and the other areas which the Nomination 
Committee identified as areas to be supplemented and/or 
strengthened during the Chairman appointment process, 
the Committee is actively proceeding with its search for an 
additional independent non-executive director and hopes to 
be in a position to recommend a candidate for appointment 
by the Board during 2015. The Committee will continue to be 
assisted by the Head of IP Exec in this recruitment process.

In connection with any proposed future appointments through 
2015, the Committee will continue to adopt a formal, rigorous 
and transparent procedure. Consideration will always be given 
to whether identified candidates have enough time available to 
devote to the role. When the Committee has found a suitable 
candidate or candidates, the Chairman of the Committee will 
make a proposal to the whole Board and the appointment is then 
the responsibility of the whole Board following recommendation 
from the Committee.

Internal control
The Board fully recognises the importance of the Guidance 
on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial 
and Business Reporting which, in September 2014, replaced 
the Financial Reporting Council’s Turnbull Guidance and other 
guidance on going concern and liquidity risk. The Group’s 
internal controls, which were Group-wide and were in place 
during the whole of 2014, were reviewed by the Board of 
Directors and were considered to be effective throughout the 
year ended 31 December 2014. 

The Board is responsible for establishing and monitoring internal 
control systems and for reviewing the effectiveness of these 
systems. The Board views the effective operation of a rigorous 
system of internal control as critical to the success of the 
Group. However, it recognises that such systems can provide 
only reasonable and not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement or loss. The key elements of the Group’s internal 
control system, all of which have been in place during the 
financial year and up to the date these financial statements were 
approved, are as follows:

Control environment and procedures
The Group has a clear organisational structure with defined 
responsibilities and accountabilities. It adopts the highest values 
surrounding quality, integrity and ethics, and these values are 
documented and communicated clearly throughout the whole 
organisation. 

Detailed written policies and procedures have been established 
covering key operating and compliance risk areas. These are 
reviewed and updated at least annually by the Board. The Board 
considers that the controls have been effective for the year 
ended 31 December 2014.

Identification and evaluation of principal risks  
and uncertainties
The operations of the Group and the implementation of its 
objectives and strategy are subject to a number of key risks and 
uncertainties. The Board actively identifies and evaluates the 
risks inherent in the business, formally reviews these annually 
and ensures that appropriate controls and procedures are in 
place to monitor and, where possible, mitigate these risks. 
Specifically, all decisions relating to strategic partnerships and 
other collaborations and acquisitions entered into by the Group 
are reserved for the Board’s review and approval. The Board 
formally reviews the performance of the Group’s university 
partnerships and other strategic collaborations and relationships. 
It also reviews equity investments on a quarterly basis, although 
performance of specific investments may be reviewed more 
frequently if deemed appropriate dependent on their relative 
size as regards the aggregate portfolio as a whole. The Board 
maintains an up-to-date Register of Risks setting out mitigations 
in place in each case. The key risks and uncertainties faced by the 
Group, as well as the relevant mitigations, are set out on pages 
36 to 39. Were more than one of the risks to occur together, the 
overall impact on the Group may be compounded.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

56

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
Our Governance Overview

Political expenditure
Although it is the Board’s policy not to incur political expenditure 
or otherwise make cash contributions to political parties, and 
it has no intention of changing that policy, the CA 2006 is very 
broadly drafted in this area and the Board is concerned that it 
may include activities such as funding conferences or supporting 
certain bodies involved in policy review and law reform. 
Accordingly, at the AGM held on 13 May 2014, the shareholders 
passed a resolution on a precautionary basis to authorise the 
Group to incur political expenditure (as defined in Section 
365 of CA 2006) not exceeding £50,000 in total at any time 
from 13 May 2014 up to the conclusion of the 2015 AGM. The 
Board intends to seek renewed authority for the Group to incur 
political expenditure of not more than £50,000 in total at the 
Company’s 2015 AGM, to be held on 12 May 2015, which they 
might otherwise be prohibited from making or incurring under 
the terms of CA 2006.

Going concern
The Directors confirm that they have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group will have adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future and accordingly 
they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman 
9 March 2015

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

Information and financial reporting systems
The Group evaluates and manages significant risks, associated 
with the process for preparing consolidated accounts, by having 
in place systems and controls that ensure adequate accounting 
records are maintained and transactions are recorded accurately 
and fairly to permit the preparation of financial statements in 
accordance with IFRS. The Board approves the annual operating 
budgets and receives details of actual performance measured 
against the budget each month. 

Relations with stakeholders
The Company is committed to a continuous dialogue with 
shareholders as it believes that it is essential to ensure amongst 
its shareholders a greater understanding of, and confidence 
in, the medium and longer term strategy of the Group and 
in the Board’s ability to oversee its implementation. It is the 
responsibility of the Board as a whole to ensure that a satisfactory 
dialogue takes place. The Board’s primary shareholder contact is 
through the Chairman, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Investment 
Officer and the Chief Financial Officer. The Board’s primary 
contact with the limited partners and advisory boards of its 
managed funds is through the Chief Investment Officer and the 
Chief Executive Officer. The Senior Independent Director and 
other Directors make themselves available, as appropriate, for 
contact with major shareholders and other stakeholders in order 
to understand their issues and concerns. Where considered 
appropriate, major institutional shareholders are consulted 
on significant changes to the Board and the structure of the 
Executive Directors’ remuneration. 

The Company uses the Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) as an 
opportunity to communicate with its shareholders. Notice of 
the AGM, which will be held at 2.00pm on 12 May 2015 at IP 
Group plc, 24 Cornhill, London, EC3V 3ND, is enclosed with this 
report. In line with the Code, the Notice of AGM will be sent to 
shareholders at least 20 working days before the meeting. Details 
of the resolutions and the explanatory notes thereto are included 
with the Notice. To ensure compliance with the Code, the Board 
proposes separate resolutions for each issue and proxy forms 
allow shareholders who are unable to attend the AGM, to vote 
for or against or to withhold their vote on each resolution. The 
results of all proxy voting are published on the Group’s website 
after the meeting and declared at the meeting itself to those 
shareholders who attend. Shareholders who attend the AGM 
will have the opportunity to ask questions and all directors are 
expected to be available to take questions. 

The Group’s website (www.ipgroupplc.com) is the primary 
source of information on the Group. The website includes an 
overview of the activities of the Group; details of its portfolio 
companies, and its key university partnerships and other strategic 
collaborations; and details of all recent Group and portfolio 
announcements.

57

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Statement

Performance out-turns:  
appropriately reflecting 
the Group’s financial 
performance

On behalf of your Board, I am pleased 
to present our Directors’ Remuneration 
Report (“DRR”) for the year ended 31 
December 2014. Our Remuneration 
Policy, which was unanimously 
approved by shareholders at our 2014 
AGM, will continue to be applied for 
2015. Shareholders will again have 
the opportunity to vote on the Annual 
Remuneration Report at the Group’s 
AGM to be held on 12 May 2015.

Performance out-turns for 2014
As has been described earlier in this Annual Report, during 2014 
the Group saw a number of transformational developments 
including the acquisition of Fusion IP, a significant capital raising 
and a number of material updates from our portfolio companies. 
However, while the Group was again profitable, its financial 
performance was more subdued, particularly when compared 
against the two preceding financial years. 

As a result the minimum 8% return on hard net assets required 
under the Group’s 2014 annual incentive scheme was not 
achieved and no bonus is payable to the Executive Directors or 
any of the Group’s staff under this scheme as a result. 

The Group’s share price performed well, increasing by over 20% 
during the year and the Group’s market capitalisation exceeded 
£1bn for the first time in the Group’s history. The cumulative 
three-year performance of the Group’s hard net assets was 18.4% 
per annum, in excess of the 15% maximum target under the 
Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”). The absolute Total 
Shareholder Return (“TSR”) performance is also currently above 
the 15% maximum target and, subject to the performance of the 
Group’s share price during the final month of the performance 
period in March 2015 (which may impact the underpin), it is 
currently anticipated that the awards granted in 2012 will vest 
either in full or close to in full. 

The Committee considers that the annual bonus and LTIP 
outcomes for the Executive Directors appropriately reflect the 
Group’s financial performance over the year and the most recent 
three-year period, respectively.

Evolution of our remuneration framework
2014 saw the implementation of the remuneration framework 
agreed after consultation with shareholders in 2013, the 
integration of Fusion IP’s staff into the Group and the alignment 
of Fusion IP’s remuneration policies with our own. The 
Committee continued to seek to further evolve the Group’s 
remuneration and incentive structures in order to attract and 
retain management and staff of the highest quality and to retain 
an appropriate level of entrepreneurial culture while ensuring that 
its structures remain in accordance with best practice for a FTSE 
250 listed business. 

The remuneration framework for 2014 remained consistent 
with that of 2013 comprising basic salary and benefits, an 
annual incentive scheme and the Group’s LTIP, as set out in the 
remuneration policy approved by shareholders. The Committee 

58

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee Reportsconsiders that these elements are appropriately aligned with the 
Group’s strategy of sourcing and developing technology-based 
businesses and seeking to generate long-term value through 
the growth in value of the Group’s holdings in such businesses 
while being mindful of the Group’s financial performance in each 
twelve month period. This framework will remain in place for 
2015 with maximum incentive opportunities unchanged. 

The Committee continues to consider that, in order to align its 
staff with its core strategic objective of evolving great ideas into 
world-changing businesses, the Group’s remuneration structure 
requires incentive levers covering both the short term (1-3 years) 
and the longer term (3-5 years) and, for those staff most closely 
connected with individual portfolio company assets, incentives 
directly aligned with the returns achieved on those specific assets, 
potentially over an even longer term (5-10 years). During 2014, the 
Committee has given initial consideration to a scheme that seeks 
to address this third lever. The Committee intends to complete its 
assessment of this potential new scheme and then consult with 
the Group’s key shareholders during the coming months as to the 
benefits it would deliver and to its implementation (including the 
potential participation of the executive directors).

Granting of 2013 and 2014 LTIP awards in the year
As described in the 2013 DRR, it was not possible to grant the 
2013 LTIP awards to all eligible staff, as a result of corporate 
activity during the second half of 2013, and the awards were 
therefore made in May 2014 alongside the 2014 LTIP awards. 
The 2013 and 2014 LTIP awards each had a face value on grant 
of 100% of the Chief Executive Officer’s base salary, while for the 
other Executive Directors, each award had a face value of 90% of 
salary, 10% lower than the level stated in the 2013 DRR. The 2014 
awards are subject to performance over the 2014-2016 financial 
years, and will vest in March 2017, whilst the 2013 awards are 
subject to performance over the 2013-2015 financial years, and 
will vest in March 2016. Any vested shares will be subject to an 
additional one-year holding period for the 2013 LTIP and a  
two-year holding period for the 2014 LTIP. 

Executive Directors’ base salaries for 2015
The Committee considers that the Group’s Executive Directors 
and other senior management are of paramount importance to 
its continued success and accordingly considers that, as part of 
a competitive overall package, base salaries should be within a 
market-competitive range (considered to be within lower quartile 
to median of companies of a similar size and complexity). The 
Committee continues to note however that, given the Group’s 
continued significant growth in assets, scale and international 
reach of operations, the salaries for certain Executive Directors 
remain significantly below this market-competitive range. 

In this context, the Committee is currently completing its review 
of the 2015 salary for the Chief Executive Officer and intends 
to consult with major shareholders, if appropriate, before 
determining the salary.

The Committee has determined that the Chief Operating Officer 
and Chief Investment Officer will receive increases of 2% with 
effect from 1 April 2015 in line with the wider business while, as 
previously communicated in consultation with major shareholders 
and reflecting the context above, the Chief Financial Officer will 

receive an increase of 14% reflecting continued progression 
towards market positioning since joined the Board (the new salary 
of £212,000 remains below the lower quartile).

Share ownership throughout the business
To further encourage share ownership throughout the Group, 
the Committee approved a share save scheme in 2014.  
All staff, including Executive Directors, are eligible to participate  
in the scheme and approximately 40% of those eligible chose  
to participate. 

Board changes
Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 
23 April 2014 and agreed to support the Group in any required 
handover activities during his six-month contractual notice 
period. He received the value of his contractual base salary, 
benefits and pension contributions to the end of his contractual 
notice period. The Committee determined that, in recognition 
of his contribution to the Group, Mr Winward would remain 
entitled to his outstanding award under the 2012 LTIP, reduced 
pro-rata for time and subject to original vesting schedule and 
performance conditions, but would receive no new awards 
under either the AIS or LTIP in 2014. 

Malus and clawback
During the period the Committee reviewed the Group’s 
Remuneration Policy, in light of the changes to the Corporate 
Governance Code, and determined that its variable incentive 
schemes already contained the requisite malus and clawback 
provisions in accordance with the Code.

Committee Chairmanship
I assumed chairmanship of the Committee from Francis 
Carpenter upon his retirement from the Board in 2014. As 
described earlier in this report, I will be assuming the role of 
Chairman of the Group with effect from the end of the March 
Board meeting and accordingly will step down as Committee 
Chairman at that point. Jonathan Brooks has agreed to 
temporarily assume the role of Committee Chairman and the 
Group intends to appoint a further independent non-executive 
director to the Board in 2015. 

Approval of Remuneration Report
Our Remuneration Policy and 2013 Remuneration Report each 
received 99.9% of votes cast in favour at our AGM in May 2014. 
The Group remains committed to transparency and I welcome 
the opportunity for continued discussion of the Group’s 
remuneration with any shareholder, either at our AGM or at any 
other time during the year.

Structure of this report
The following pages contain an extract of our Remuneration 
Policy (as approved by shareholders), a summary of how we 
intend to implement the policy during 2015, and the disclosure 
of outcomes in respect of 2014. 

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Mike Humphrey
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
9 March 2015

59

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Policy extract

The Remuneration Policy was approved at the 2014 AGM held in May 2014 and was effective as of that date. An extract of the policy 
table for executive directors contained in that policy is re-produced below for information only. The full Remuneration Policy report 
is contained on pages 55 to 61 of the 2013 annual report which is available in the investor relations section of the Group’s website. 
Where relevant, references previously to 2013 and 2014 have been updated to reflect the application in 2014 and 2015.

Remuneration Policy table
The table below sets out the key components of the Policy for Executive Directors’ remuneration:

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Salary

To provide an 
appropriate level of 
fixed cash income 
to attract and retain 
individuals with the 
personal attributes, skills 
and experience required 
to deliver the Group’s 
strategy

Generally reviewed annually with 
increases currently effective from 
1 April. 

Base salaries will be set by the 
Committee taking into account:

 ■ scale, scope and responsibility of 

the role;

 ■ skills and experience of the 

individual;

 ■ retention risk;

 ■ base salary of other employees;

 ■ base salary of individuals 

undertaking similar roles in 
companies of comparable size 
and complexity; and

 ■ appropriate market benchmarks.

None, although 
performance of 
the individual is 
considered by 
the Committee 
when setting and 
reviewing salaries 
annually.

There is no prescribed 
maximum annual salary.

Annual salary increases 
for executive directors 
will not normally exceed 
the average increase 
awarded to other  
UK-based employees. 

Increases may be 
above this level in 
circumstances where 
the Committee 
considers it appropriate, 
for example if there 
is an increase in 
the scale, scope or 
responsibility of the 
role or to allow the 
base salary of recently 
appointed executives 
who are appointed on 
initially lower levels of 
base salary to move 
towards market norms 
as their experience and 
contribution increase.

Where a significant 
discrepancy exists 
between an executive 
director’s current salary 
and market levels, the 
Committee will normally 
phase any increases 
over a number of years.

60

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee Reports 
Component

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Pension

Benefits

Provide a competitive 
post-retirement benefit 
in a way that manages 
the overall cost to the 
Group in order to retain 
individuals with the 
personal attributes, skills 
and experience required 
to deliver the Group’s 
strategy

Provide a competitive 
and appropriate 
benefits package to 
assist individuals in 
carrying out their duties 
effectively and to retain 
individuals with the 
personal attributes, skills 
and experience required 
to deliver the Group’s 
strategy

Not applicable

Not applicable

Contribution to Group Pension 
Plan (defined contribution scheme) 
or to personal pension plan of the 
relevant executive’s choosing or an 
equivalent cash alternative.

Ongoing benefits typically 
comprise, but are not limited to, 
health and travel insurance, income 
protection and life assurance 
and may also comprise a car 
benefit (or cash equivalent) and 
telecommunications such as 
broadband.

The Group also offers certain 
salary sacrifice schemes including 
childcare vouchers, purchase of 
additional holiday and Ride to Work.

Executive directors may also 
participate in any all-employee 
share plans that may be operated 
by the Group from time to time 
on the same terms as other 
employees.

Additional benefits, which may 
include relocation expenses, 
housing allowance or other 
benefits-in-kind, may be provided in 
certain circumstances if considered 
appropriate and reasonable by the 
Committee, including as may be 
required on recruitment.

10% of base salary for 
all executive directors in 
2014 and 2015.

No element other 
than base salary is 
pensionable.

Absolute maximum 
pension is 15% of base 
salary.

The cost of benefits 
provided changes in 
accordance with market 
conditions and will, 
therefore, determine 
the maximum amount 
that would be paid in 
the form of benefits 
under the Policy. 
There is therefore 
no overall maximum 
opportunity under this 
this component of the 
Policy.

One-off benefits, e.g. 
relocation, shall not 
ordinarily exceed 25% 
of base salary other 
than in exceptional 
circumstances at 
the discretion of the 
Committee.

Maximum awards under 
all-employee share 
plans would be subject 
to prevailing statutory 
limits.

61

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Policy extract continued

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Annual 
Incentive 
Scheme 
(“AIS”)

To provide a simple, 
competitive, 
performance-linked 
annual incentive 
mechanism that will:

 ■ attract, retain and 

motivate individuals 
with the required 
personal attributes, 
skills and experience;

 ■ provide a real 

incentive to achieve 
our strategic 
objectives; and

 ■ align the interests of 
management and 
shareholders.

The maximum annual 
level of award is 100% of 
salary.

Each year the 
committee determines 
the maximum 
opportunity for each 
executive director 
within the above Policy 
limit. The maximum 
opportunity for each 
director in 2015 is set 
at 100% for the Chief 
Executive Officer 
and 75% for all other 
executive directors 
(see the Annual 
Remuneration Report on 
page 66).

Specific targets and 
weightings will vary 
from year to year 
in accordance with 
strategic priorities 
but may include 
targets relating to:

 ■ Relative or 

absolute TSR; 

 ■ Hard net assets; 

 ■ Financial 

performance;

 ■ Appropriate 

non-financial 
measures; and

 ■ Attainment 
of personal 
objectives.

Weighting will be 
primarily towards 
Group financial 
performance for 
executive directors.

Performance 
will typically be 
measured over one 
year.

The AIS is reviewed annually prior 
to the start of each financial year to 
ensure the detailed performance 
measures and weightings are 
appropriate and continue to 
support the business strategy. 
Financial and/or non-financial 
performance targets are set at or 
around the start of each financial 
year.

Actual AIS amounts are determined 
via a two-stage process. Firstly, 
performance against the agreed 
metrics is assessed. Secondly, the 
Committee reviews these results in 
the context of underlying business 
performance and the Group’s 
financial position and may adjust 
the stage one outcome at its 
discretion.

Subject to a suitable minimum 
amount, set by the Committee at 
the start of each year, awards will 
typically be payable 50% in cash 
and 50% in IP Group shares. The 
share element is in the form of 
conditional awards of shares or 
nil-cost options (or equivalent at 
the Committee’s discretion) and 
is subject to further time-based 
vesting over two years (50% after 
year 1 and 50% after year 2)  
although the Committee may 
adjust the % split between  
cash and shares based on the 
financial position of the Group. The 
IP Group shares element shall be 
satisfied by awards of options under 
the deferred bonus share plan 
(“DBSP”) which is being proposed 
for approval by shareholders at the 
Group’s forthcoming AGM.

In the case of intended fraud or 
misconduct by a participant that 
contributes to a significant error in 
financial information, the Company 
will be entitled to claw back the 
value of any cash amount paid 
under the AIS for that year and to 
cancel the vesting of any deferred 
share element, for a period of up 
to three years following the date of 
award or payment.

62

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsComponent

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Long-term 
incentive plan 
(“LTIP”)

To provide a 
competitive, 
performance-linked 
long-term incentive 
mechanism that will:

 ■ attract, retain and 

motivate individuals 
with the required 
personal attributes, 
skills and experience;

 ■ provide a real 

incentive to achieve 
our strategic 
objectives; and

 ■ align the interests of 
management and 
shareholders.

The LTIP is reviewed annually prior 
to the start of each financial year to 
ensure the detailed performance 
measures and weightings are 
appropriate and continue to 
support the business strategy. 
Financial and/or non-financial 
performance targets are set at or 
around the start of each financial 
year.

Awards under the LTIP typically 
comprise conditional awards 
of shares in IP Group (although 
instruments with similar economic 
effect may be used if considered 
appropriate). 

From the 2013 LTIP awards 
onwards any share awards that vest, 
net of any tax and NICs liabilities, 
are subject to a further holding 
period. The holding period will be 
one year for the 2013 LTIP and two 
years for subsequent awards. 

In the case of intended fraud or 
misconduct by a participant that 
contributes to an error in financial 
information that materially affects 
the Company’s share value, the 
Company will be entitled to reduce 
the number of shares in respect 
of an unvested award and/or claw 
back the value of any shares subject 
to this holding period.

Calculations of the achievement of 
the vesting targets are reviewed and 
approved by the Committee.

Specific targets may 
vary from year to 
year in accordance 
with strategic 
priorities but shall 
be based on:

 ■ Relative or 

absolute TSR; 
and 

 ■ Hard net assets.

These performance 
criteria shall be 
presented in a 
matrix format 
similar to that set 
out in the Annual 
Remuneration 
Report.

The level of vesting 
for threshold 
performance is 30% 
of the maximum.

Where absolute 
TSR is used as a 
performance metric, 
awards may be 
subject to a relative 
performance 
underpin against 
an appropriate 
benchmark index or 
comparator group.

Performance 
will ordinarily be 
measured based 
on a performance 
period of at least 
three years.

The maximum annual 
level of award is:

 ■ 150% of salary for 

the Chief executive 
officer; and

 ■ A lower percentage 
for other Executive 
Directors

 ■ Each year the 
Committee 
determines 
the maximum 
opportunity for each 
executive director 
within the below 
scheme limits. 
The maximum 
opportunity for each 
director in 2013 and 
2014 was set at 100% 
of base salary for 
the Chief Executive 
Officer and 90% for 
all other executives. 
For 2015, the awards 
will not exceed the 
policy maxima. 

As described on page 
67 of the Annual 
Remuneration Report, 
the Committee 
determined that the 
2013 LTIP awards (that 
could not be granted in 
2013) would be granted 
in 2014. 

The overall maximum 
under the LTIP approved 
by shareholders is 400% 
of salary. However, the 
policy limits set out 
above will apply and 
this plan limit will only 
be used in exceptional 
circumstances (such as 
a buyout on recruitment 
or in the circumstances 
described above 
regarding the 2013 LTIP).

63

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report 

Statement of implementation of 
remuneration policy in the following 
financial year
Salary and fixed components
With effect from 1 April 2015, the base salaries of the Executive 
Directors will be: 

Base salary

Increase

Mike Townend (CIO)

£236,650

2% (£4,650)

Greg Smith (CFO)

£212,000 14% (£26,000)

David Baynes (COO)

£236,650

2% (£4,650)

The Committee considers that, as part of a competitive overall 
package, base salaries should be within a market-competitive 
range (considered to be within lower quartile to median of 
companies of a similar size and complexity) The Committee 
continues to note however that, given the Group’s continued 
significant growth in assets, and scale and international reach of 
operations, the salaries for certain Executive Directors remain 
significantly below this market-competitive range. 

In this context, the Committee is currently assessing the base 
salary that should apply from 1 April 2015 for the Group’s CEO, 
Alan Aubrey (currently £261,000). If appropriate, the Committee 
will consult with major shareholders before determining the salary. 

The increases for Mike Townend and David Baynes are in line 
with the general rate of increase across the business. The 
increase for Greg Smith reflects an increase that, as described 
earlier in this report, is being phased over a number of years to 
bring him closer to a market competitive salary commensurate 
with his increased experience having initially joined the Board on 
a lower base salary. 

Pension and benefits will continue to be in line with the benefits 
stated in the policy table.

Incentives
There will be no change to the maximum opportunity under 
our AIS, being set by the Committee at 100% of base salary 
for the Chief Executive Officer and 75% of base salary for the 
other Executive Directors. As with the 2013 and 2014 AIS, the 
performance measure shall remain the return achieved on the 
Group’s hard NAV. Threshold vesting of 25% of the maximum 
award will be available provided a minimum return of 8% is 
achieved while the maximum awards pool will be available 
should a return of 18% or greater be achieved. The Committee 
considered that the lower maximum target level (compared to 
22.5% in previous years) is appropriate to account for the Group’s 
increased cash balances on which it is not currently possible to 
achieve a return in excess of 1-2%. 

The 2015 LTIP awards will be made at the same levels that apply 
for the 2014 awards, being 100% of base salary for the Chief 
Executive Officer and 90% of base salary for all other Executive 
Directors. Performance will continue to be assessed against 
growth in hard NAV and TSR performance (with the underpin 
based on relative TSR against the FTSE250) as per the vesting 
tables for the 2013 and 2014 LTIPs set out above. 

Chairman and Non-executive Directors
The Group recently appointed a new Chairman, currently 
anticipated to be with effect from 24 March 2015, and as part of 
this recruitment exercise the Committee sought benchmarking 
information from Spencer Stuart, the executive search and 
selection firm used in the selection process, as well as reviewing 
available market benchmarks. As a result of this exercise, the 
Committee determined that the fees of the new Chairman would 
be £150,000. The new Chairman, who is an internal candidate 
currently serving on the Committee, was not part of the 
Committee’s decision with respect to these fees.

The fees of the Non-executive Directors will be £38,750 
(reflecting a 2% increase compared to 2014/15). Additional fees 
for chairmanship of a board committee, or for being senior 
independent director, shall remain £7,500.

64

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsSingle figure for total remuneration (audited)
The following table sets out the single figure for total remuneration for Directors for the financial years ended 31 December 2014  
and 2013.

All £000s

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey4

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

David Baynes5

Charles Winward6,7

Non-executive directors

Bruce Smith

Mike Humphrey

Jonathan Brooks

Doug Liversidge8

Lynn Gladden9

Francis Carpenter10

Base salary/fees
2013
2014

Benefits

Pension1

2014

2013

2014

2013

Annual Bonus (AIS)2
2013

2014

LTIP3

Total

2014

2013

2014

2013

191

231

180

181

129

65

45

45

29

29

22

189

222

149

—

142

62

42

42

—

—

41

4

7

4

4

2

—

—

—

—

—

—

4

5

2

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

—

23

23

18

16

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

25

21

14

—

16

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

254

170

120

—

124

—

—

—

—

—

—

 620 

1,759

838

2,231

 472

1,340

733

1,758

292

830

494

1,115

 — 

—

210

894

201

347

—

1,180

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

65

45

45

29

29

22

62

42

42

—

—

41

1.  Pension includes payments made to defined benefit schemes on behalf of the Directors or the value of any cash equivalent if applicable.

2.  AIS bonus payable in respect of the financial year including the 50% which is deferred into shares over two years at face value at date of award. Further information about how 

the level of 2014 awards is provided in the additional disclosures section overleaf.

3.  The 2014 LTIP value is based on the 2012 LTIP award due to vest in March 2015. The value of the award is based on performance to 31 December 2014. The 2013 LTIP value 
has been updated to reflect the actual share price on vesting, being £2.00 per share. Further information about the level of vesting for both of these awards is provided in the 
additional disclosures section overleaf.

4. 

In addition, Alan Aubrey retained board fees in 2014 totalling £68,333 (2013: £60,000) from portfolio companies in which the Group is a shareholder that were deducted from 
his base salary, as described further under “Outside appointments for executive directors” on page 72.

5.  David Baynes was appointed to the Board with effect from 20 March 2014.

6.  Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014. Further information on the treatment of his outstanding LTIP awards is described further on 

page 68. 

7. 

In addition, Charles Winward retained board fees up to his resignation date in 2014 totalling £5,000 (2013: £13,750) from portfolio companies in which the Group is a 
shareholder that were deducted from his base salary, as described further under “Outside appointments for executive directors” on page 72.

8.  Doug Liversidge was appointed to the Board with effect from 20 March 2014.

9. 

Lynn Gladden was appointed to the Board with effect from 26 March 2014.

10.  Francis Carpenter retired from the Board with effect from 01 July 2014.

65

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Long-term incentive scheme

2012 LTIP awards due to vest in March 2015
The 2012 LTIP awards were based on the performance of the 
Group’s Hard NAV (the Group’s net assets excluding intangibles 
and the Oxford Equity Rights asset) for the three financial years 
ending on 31 December 2014 and Total Shareholder Return 
(“TSR”) from date of award to the ordinary vesting date, being 31 
March 2015. Both performance measures were combined into 
a matrix format as per the vesting table below. The total award 
is subject to an underpin based on the relative performance of 
the Group’s TSR to that of the FTSE Small Cap index, which can 
reduce the awards by up to 50%

)
.
a
p

.

(

R
S
T

15%

10%

8%

<8%

60%

75%

90%

100%

30%

45%

60%

90%

15%

0%

<8%

30%

45%

75%

15%

8%

30%

60%

10%

15%

Growth in NAV (p.a.)

Performance condition Target performance

Hard NAV1
(at 31 Dec 2014)

8%: £365.4m
15%: £421.8m

Annual TSR2
(share price)

8%: 164.1p
15%: 196.0p

Actual/forecast 
performance

£451.3m
(18.4% p.a. growth)

204.4p
(18.4% p.a. growth)

Comparative TSR

FTSE Small cap
+61%

IP Group
+55%

1.  Hard NAV target increased by Committee to reflect £21.7m Fusion IP net assets 

acquired and £97.4m net proceeds of the Group’s placing.

2.  TSR performance shown to 31 December 2014. Actual performance period to  

31 March 2015.

The actual performance of the Group in terms of Hard NAV 
growth was in excess of the upper target and, based on the 
positions as at 31 December 2014 and more particularly the date 
of this report, it appears that the upper TSR target will also be 
exceeded at the end of the performance period. The underpin 
calculation at 31 December 2014 suggests that some level of 
modification to the overall vesting may be required, however as 
at the date of this report, the Group’s TSR currently exceeds that 
of the FTSE SmallCap and as a result of this, it is anticipated that 
100%, or near to 100%, of the 2012 LTIP awards will ordinarily 
vest on 31 March 2015. 

Additional disclosures for single figure for 
total remuneration table (audited)
Base salary 

2014
Following the consultation process with shareholders during the 
first half of 2013, the following changes in base salary (before any 
deductions for director fees received directly from Group portfolio 
companies) were introduced with effect from 1 April 2014:
Former base 
salary 
(2013/14)

New base 
salary
 (2014/15)

% change

Alan Aubrey

£254,250

£261,000

Mike Townend

£226,000

£232,000

Greg Smith

£160,000

£186,000

David Baynes1

-

£232,000

3%

3%

16%

N/A

1.  David Baynes was appointed to the Board with effect from 20 March 2014.

The average increase across all staff, excluding Directors and new 
joiners (including former Fusion IP plc employees), was 13.1% 
which was generally reflective of a 2.5% base level with additional 
increases to reflect promotions, increases in role scope and 
increases in an individual’s skills and experience. As a result of the 
review undertaken in 2013, the Committee considered that some 
of the Directors’ salaries were considerably below “market” and 
as the Executives’ tenure and experience continues to grow, the 
Committee continues to take steps to increase the base salaries 
accordingly towards the target salaries of between lower quartile 
and median of the relevant benchmarks.

The Chairman’s and Non-executive Directors’ fees were 
increased by 2.5% during the year, whilst additional fees for 
chairing a sub-committee increased from £5,000 to £7,500.

Annual incentive scheme 

2014
The targets for the 2014 AIS were solely financial in nature 
and were based on the annual return on hard net assets (i.e. 
excluding intangible assets and the Oxford equity rights asset) 
which were £315.5m at 1 January 2014 but were subsequently 
increased by the Committee to reflect the additional assets 
acquired through the acquisition of Fusion IP plc and the £97.4m 
net proceeds of the Group’s capital raise. The targets for 2014 
and the outturn against these were as follows: 

Performance 
condition

Return on 
Hard NAV

Vesting criteria

Actual 
performance

8% return (£33.4m): 25% 
of maximum opportunity  
(“threshold”) 
22.5% return (£93.6m): 100% 
of maximum opportunity

4.0% return 
(£16.7m)

As shown in the table, and as noted previously, the financial 
performance of the Group in 2014 was subdued relative to 
previous years with a 4% actual return on hard NAV being 
achieved. Therefore, there was no awards pool available for 
allocation by the Committee and no amounts were received by 
the Executives for the 2014 year. 

66

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee Reports 
2011 LTIP awards that vested in March 2014
The following table sets out the outcomes of the performance 
measures relating to the 2011 LTIP awards against the vesting 
criteria. 

)
.
a
p

.

(

R
S
T

15%

10%

8%

<8%

60%

75%

90%

100%

30%

45%

60%

90%

15%

0%

<8%

30%

45%

75%

15%

8%

30%

60%

10%

15%

Growth in NAV (p.a.)

Performance condition Target performance

Actual/forecast 
performance

Hard NAV
(at 31 Dec 2013)

8%: £236.7m
15%: £285.8m

£315.5m
(18.8% p.a. growth)

Annual TSR1
(share price)

8%: 63.0p
15%: 76.0p

194.0p
(73% p.a. growth)

Comparative TSR1

FTSE Small cap
+72%

IP Group
+288%

1.  Annual and comparative TSR for IP Group subject to three-month average at start 
and end of period, start adjusted upwards to 50p to reflect price of Group’s 2011 
placing.

As the performance measures were achieved in full and the 
underpin was exceeded, 100% of the 2011 LTIP awards vested on 
31 March 2014. 

2014 and 2013 LTIP awards 
During 2013, the Committee undertook a consultation with its 
largest shareholders on the rebalancing of the Group’s incentive 
mix and the Committee’s intention had been to implement this 
new incentive framework in 2013. However, as a result of the 
corporate activity during the second half of 2013 (culminating in 
the Group’s recommended offer for Fusion IP plc and a capital 
raising in early 2014), there was no appropriate opportunity to 
grant the agreed 2013 LTIP awards during that year. 

As described in the 2013 DRR, the Committee therefore granted 
the 2013 LTIP awards at the same time as the 2014 LTIP awards. 
The 2013 and 2014 LTIP awards each had a face value of 100% of 
salary for the Chief Executive Officer and 90% of salary for other 
Executive Directors, based on the share price at date of grant and 
vesting subject to performance. The award levels for the other 
Executive Directors for both years were 10% lower than those 
communicated during consultation in order to maintain a level 
of differentiation from the Chief Executive Officer’s award. Any 
shares that vest (net of tax) shall be subject to a further one-year 
holding period for the 2013 LTIPs and a two-year holding period 
for the 2014 LTIPs.

The performance conditions that apply to both of these awards 
will follow the same matrix structure with the same vesting 
parameters as that set out above for the previous awards, with 
the starting point as set out below. 

2014 LTIP
Hard NAV growth will be measured over the three-year period to 31 December 2016 (starting point: £315.5m, adjusted upwards for 
the £21.7m Fusion IP plc net assets acquired and £97.4m net proceeds of the Group’s placing) and TSR shall be measured from March 
2014 to March 2017 with a one-month average (starting point: 210.8p). The underpin will be with reference to TSR performance 
against the FTSE 250 over this same period.

Executive Director

Type of interest

Basis of award 
(% salary)

Face value

Threshold 
vesting*

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

David Baynes

2014 LTIP

2014 LTIP

2014 LTIP

2014 LTIP

100%

90%

90%

90%

£261k

£209k

£167k

£209k

30%

30%

30%

30%

End of performance period

31 Dec 2016 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2017 (TSR)

31 Dec 2016 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2017 (TSR)

31 Dec 2016 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2017 (TSR)

31 Dec 2016 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2017 (TSR)

* 

 Represents threshold vesting against both elements of the performance matrix. Lower vesting is possible if only one element of the matrix is partially met.

**   The face value is calculated using the share price used to determine the number of shares awarded, being 177.5p, the closing price of the Group’s shares on the day 

immediately prior to the date of award. Awards were calculated by reference to the salary effective for the 2014/15 salary year. 

67

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee Reports 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

2013 LTIP
Hard NAV growth will be measured over the three-year period to 31 December 2015 (starting point: £236.6m, adjusted upwards for 
the £21.7m Fusion IP plc net assets acquired and £97.4m net proceeds of the Group’s placing) and TSR shall be measured from March 
2013 to March 2016 with a one-month average (starting point: 143p). The underpin will be with reference to TSR performance against 
the FTSE 250 over this same period.

Executive Director

Type of interest

Basis of award 
(% salary)

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

2013 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2013 LTIP

100%

90%

90%

Face value

£254k

£203k

£144k

Threshold 
vesting*

30%

30%

30%

End of performance period

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

* 

 Represents threshold vesting against both elements of the performance matrix. Lower vesting is possible if only one element of the matrix is partially met.

**   The face value is calculated using the share price used to determine the number of shares awarded, being 177.5p, the closing price of the Group’s shares on the day 

immediately prior to the date of award. Awards were calculated by reference to the salary effective for the 2013/14 salary year. 

Loss of office payments (audited 
information)
No payments for loss of office were made to past directors 
during the year. No payments have been made that have not 
already been included in the single figure of remuneration set out 
earlier in this report. 

Change in remuneration of the Chief 
Executive Officer compared to Group 
employees
The table below sets out the increase in total remuneration 
of the Chief Executive Officer and that of our UK employees 
(excluding Directors):

% change in  
base salary 
2013 to 2014

% change in 
bonus  
2013 to 2014

% change in 
benefits  
(exc. pensions) 
2013 to 2014

CEO

UK employees

2.7%

12.8%

(100%)

(100%)

3.7%

34.7%

Remuneration for the MD of TTV who stepped 
down from the Board in 2014 (audited information)
As described earlier in this report, Charles Winward stepped 
down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014 and agreed 
to support the Group in any required handover activities during 
his six-month contractual notice period. Mr Winward received 
the value of his contractual base salary, benefits and pension 
contributions to the end of his contractual notice period. The 
Committee determined that, in recognition of his contribution 
to the Group during the relevant performance periods, Mr 
Winward remained entitled to the deferred cash and deferred 
share elements of his 2013 annual incentive scheme award but 
would not be eligible for an annual incentive award for 2014. The 
Committee further determined that his outstanding award under 
the Group’s 2012 LTIP would remain in force, but reduced on a 
prorated basis for time, and would remain subject to the original 
performance targets and vesting timeline of the award. The 
Committee determined that Mr Winward would not be eligible to 
be granted a 2013 or 2014 LTIP award as a result of his stepping 
down prior to these being made to the rest of the Group’s 
eligible staff. Mr Winward received no additional remuneration as 
a result of his stepping down from the Board.

68

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsHistorical executive pay and Group performance 
The table and graph below allow comparison of the Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) of the Group and the Chief Executive Officer 
remuneration outcomes over the last six years. 

The chart below shows the Group’s TSR performance against the performance of the FTSE All-Share and FTSE SmallCap indices 
over the six-year period to 31 December 2014. The Directors have selected the FTSE All-Share and FTSE SmallCap indices as, in 
their opinion, these indices comprise the most relevant equity indices of which the Company was a member during the majority 
of the period in question and against which total shareholder return of IP Group plc should be measured. A chart showing the TSR 
performance of the FTSE 250 index has also been included as additional information since the Group became a constituent of this 
index during 2012.

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

IP Group

FTSE Small Cap

FTSE All Share

FTSE 250

Historical Chief Executive Officer remuneration outcomes
The table below summarises the Chief Executive Officer single figure for total remuneration, annual bonus pay-out and LTIP vesting as 
a percentage of maximum opportunity for the current year and previous five years. 

Chief Executive Officer: Alan Aubrey

CEO single figure of remuneration (£000s)

Annual bonus pay-out (% of maximum)

LTIP vesting (% of maximum)

2009

223

n/a

n/a

2010

193

n/a

0%

2011

209

n/a

n/a

2012

3,257

n/a

81%

2013

2,231

100%

100%

20141

838

0%

100%

1. 

LTIP vesting is based on the current expectations of the performance against the 2012 LTIP targets as discussed on page 66.

Relative spend on pay
The chart below shows the total employee costs, change in 
“hard” NAV and change in share price from 2013 to 2014.

6.1

5.1

2013

2014

451.3

205.0

315.5

169.8

Total employee costs (£m) +19.6% 

NAV (£m) +43.0%

Share price (p) +20.7%

The information shown in this chart is based on the following:

Total employee pay: Total staff costs from note 8 on page 101, 
including wages and salaries, social security costs, pension and 
share-based payments.

Change in “hard” NAV: change in the Group’s net assets 
excluding goodwill, intangibles and the Oxford Equity Rights 
asset taken from the statement of financial position on page 88.

Returns to shareholders: since the Group does not currently 
pay a dividend, returns to shareholders are represented by the 
change in the Group’s share price over the period from  
31 December 2013 to 31 December 2014.

69

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited information)
The Group’s Remuneration Policy contains minimum shareholding requirements for each of its Executive Directors. 

The Committee has set the current limits at 2.0× salary for the Chief Executive Officer, and 1.5× salary for all other Executive Directors.

This level of shareholding is required to be met within four years of 1 July 2013 or date of appointment, if later. If the guideline is not 
met within this timeframe then the Committee will discuss with the relevant executive director a plan to ensure that the guideline can 
be met within a reasonable timeframe. The Committee will ordinarily require executive directors to retain all shares received under the 
AIS or LTIP, other than as required to meet tax and NIC liabilities, until the guideline is met.

At the end of the year, all the Executive Directors met this requirement. 

Interests in shares
The Directors who held office during 2014 had the following beneficial interests in the ordinary shares of the Company:

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

David Baynes

Bruce Smith 

Jonathan Brooks

Mike Humphrey

Doug Liversidge

Lynn Gladden

Former directors (interests as at date of leaving the Board)

Charles Winward (resigned 23 April 2014)

Francis Carpenter (retired 01 July 2014)

31 December 2014
Number of shares

2,368,537

1,011,023

289,919

426.066

236,592

60,000

80,000

75,297

–

329,467

239,151

There have been no changes in the interests of the current Executive Directors set out above between 31 December 2014 and  
9 March 2015.

Long-Term Incentive Plan
Directors’ participations in the Group’s LTIP are:

Vested 
during 
the year

Lapsed 
during 
the year

Potential 
conditional 
interest in 
shares at 
31 December 
2014

Share price 
at date of 
conditional 
award
(p)

Earliest 
vesting 
date(s)

Number of 
shares 
conditionally 
held at 
1 January 
2014 

879,654

302,695

Conditional 
shares 
notionally 
awarded in 
the year

—

—

—

—

143,239

147,042

(879,654)

—

—

—

1,182,349

290,281

(879,654)

670,213

230,625

—

—

—

—

114,592

117,634

(670,213)

—

—

—

900,838

232,226

(670,213)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

54

302,695

143,239

147,042

592,976

135.5 31 March 2015

177.5 31 March 2016

177.5 31 March 2017

—

54

230,625

114,592

117,634

462,851

135.5 31 March 2015

177.5 31 March 2016

177.5 31 March 2017

Alan Aubrey

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2014 LTIP

Mike Townend

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2014 LTIP

70

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsNumber of 
shares 
conditionally 
held at 
1 January 
2014 

Conditional 
shares 
notionally 
awarded in 
the year

Vested 
during 
the year

Lapsed 
during 
the year

Potential 
conditional 
interest in 
shares at 
31 December 
2014

Share price 
at date of 
conditional 
award
(p)

Earliest 
vesting 
date(s)

414,894

142,768

—

—

—

—

81,127

94,310

(414,894)

—

—

—

557,662

175,437

(414,894)

—

—

117,634

117,634

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

54

142,768

81,127

94,310

318,205

117,634

117,634

135.5 31 March 2015

177.5 31 March 2016

177.5 31 March 2017

177.5 31 March 2017

—

54

446,809

153,750

600,559

—

—

—

(446,809)

—

(51,250)

102,500

135.5 31 March 2015

(446,809)

(51,250)

102,500

Greg Smith

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2014 LTIP

David Baynes1

2014 LTIP

Charles Winward2

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

1.  David Baynes joined the Board with effect from 20 March 2014. 

2.  Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014. Upon resignation he forfeited his entitlement to one third of his potential 2012 LTIP awards and 

received no awards in connection with 2013 and 2014. 

Other long-term interests – legacy arrangements (audited information)
In addition to the Executive Directors’ remuneration arrangements, the Group also operates co-investment and carried interest 
arrangements relating to certain venture capital funds that are under its management. Under the co-investment arrangements, 
executive directors make minority capital and loan commitments to IP Venture Fund (“IPVF”) alongside the Group. Executives are 
entitled to participate in a carried interest scheme in respect of IPVF and The North East Technology Fund LP alongside the Group. 
Carried interest provides a preferential return to participants once the partnership in question has returned all funds contributed by 
limited partners together with a pre-agreed rate of return. The carried interest and co-investment arrangements will generally contain 
forfeiture provisions in respect of leavers over the investment period of the relevant partnership (typically 5-6 years). 

As described in the Policy, no new allocations of this kind will be made to executive directors in future however the current 
outstanding interests in co-investment and carried interest schemes in connection with the Group’s managed funds are as follows:

IPVF co-investment arrangements
The Executive Directors’ commitments to, and returns from, IPVF are set out below. Commitments are made indirectly through the IP 
Venture Fund (FP) LP, which is the founder partner of IPVF.

Total 
commitment
£000

Limited 
partnership 
interest
of IPVF

Total capital 
contributed to 
1 January 2014 
£000

Capital 
contributions 
during the 
year
£000

Total capital 
contributions at 
31 December 
2014
£000

Capital 
amounts 
repaid during 
the year
£000

Total capital 
amounts repaid 
to 31 December 
2014
£000

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward1

Total

56

56

35

56

203

0.18%

0.18%

0.11%

0.18%

0.65%

48

48

27

48

171

5

5

5

5

20

53

53

32

53

191

20

20

12

20

72

24

24

14

24

86

1.  As described earlier in this report, Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014. Mr Winward retained the liability to meet his capital 

commitments to IPVF.

71

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Carried interest arrangements
The Executive Directors’ interests in carried interest schemes are set out below:

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward(v)

Fund(i)

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

Carried 
interest(ii)
at 1 January
2014 

Awarded 
during 
the year

Transferred 
during 
the year

Lapsed 
during 
the year

Scheme 
interestat
31 December
2014(iii)

Accrued 
value(iv)of scheme
interest at
31 December
2014
£000

1.81%

1.55%

1.81%

1.15%

1.14%

0.85%

1.81%

0.45%

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1.81%

1.55%

1.81%

1.15%

1.14%

0.85%

1.81%

0.45%

366

—

366

—

231

—

366

—

(i)  Under the IPVF fund LPA, payments to participants are made when all limited partners have been repaid their contributions together with a hurdle rate of 8% compound 

interest. Under the North East Technology Fund (“NETF”) scheme, payments to participants are made when all limited partners have been repaid their contributions together 
with a hurdle rate of 3.5% compound interest.

(ii)  Scheme interest represents the percentage of the relevant pool of investments in respect of which the participant is entitled to participate in the realised profits assuming the 

relevant hurdle return has been met.

(iii)  The schemes contain forfeiture provisions over the investment period of the fund which may reduce the scheme interest accruing to any participant. The table reflects the 

maximum scheme interest receivable should no forfeiture occur.

(iv)  Accrued value of scheme interests is calculated based upon the current fair value of the relevant limited partnership’s assets in excess of the capital contributed and the hurdle 

rate of return. Any payments will only be made following full repayment of limited partners’ loan commitments and the hurdle return and accordingly actual payments under 
the scheme, if any, may be materially different to those set out above.

(v)  As described earlier in this report, Charles Winward stepped down from the Board with effect from 23 April 2014. Mr Winward had served as a Group employee throughout 

IPVF’s five-year investment period and accordingly met the criteria to retain all of his interests in this fund.

Former Fusion IP LTIP
As an executive director of Fusion IP plc, Mr Baynes was conditionally awarded 1,000,000 shares in Fusion IP plc under the Fusion IP 
LTIP. As part of the arrangements for the acquisition of Fusion IP plc, Mr Baynes’ Fusion IP LTIP awards were converted into awards 
over IP Group shares at the same conversion price per share as the scheme of arrangement was undertaken (0.446 IP Group plc 
shares for every Fusion IP plc share). The awards will vest on 31 December 2017 provided certain performance conditions are met 
which relate to, inter alia, the growth in value of Fusion IP plc’s net asset value (“Fusion NAV”) from the date of acquisition and the 
continued employment of the individual by the Group. In summary, if Fusion NAV growth of 10% per annum is achieved then 30% 
of an award shall vest. Maximum vesting will occur if Fusion NAV growth of 20% per annum is achieved with straight-line vesting 
between 30 and 100% if Fusion NAV growth of 10%-20% per annum is achieved. No vesting shall occur if Fusion NAV growth of less 
than 10% is achieved. Mr Baynes’ entitlements under the Former Fusion IP LTIP are set out in the following table:

Number 
of shares 
conditionally 
held at 
1 January 
2014 

—

—

Conditional 
shares 
notionally 
awarded 
in the year

446,000

446,000

Vested 
during 
the year

—

—

Potential 
conditional 
interest in shares 
at 31 December 
2014

Lapsed 
during 
the year

—

—

446,000

446,000

David Baynes

Total

Share price 
at date of 
conditional 
award(p)

Earliest vesting date(s)

n/a 31 December 2017

Outside appointments for executive directors
Any proposed external directorships are considered by the Board to ensure they do not cause a conflict of interest but, subject to this, 
executive directors may accept a maximum of two outside non-executive appointments and indeed the Board believes that it is part 
of their ongoing development to do so. Where an executive director accepts an appointment to the board of a company in which the 
Group is a shareholder, the Group generally retains the related fees. In the limited circumstances where the executive director receives 
such fees directly, such sums are deducted from their base salary from the Group. Fees earned for directorships of companies in which 
the Group does not have a shareholding are normally retained by the relevant director.

72

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsOur Governance Committee Reports

Service agreements

Effective dates of service contracts of the Executive Directors

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Present

Alan
Aubrey

20 Jan 2005

Mike
Townend

Greg 
Smith

David 
Baynes

5 Mar 2007

2 Jun 2011

20 Mar 2014

Effective dates of letters of appointment of the Non-executive Directors

3 Sep 2007

Bruce
Smith

Jonathan
Brooks

Mike
Humphrey

Lynn
Gladden

Doug           
Liversidge

31 Aug 2011

14 Oct 2011

26 Mar 2014

20 Mar 2014

The Executive Directors have service contracts that commenced 
on the dates set out in the chart above and contain a contractual 
notice period of six months by either party. The Non-executive 
Directors have letters of appointment that commenced on the 
dates set out in the chart above, are generally for an initial fixed 
term of three years, which is reviewed and may be extended for 
a further three years, and are terminable on three months’ notice 
by either party. In accordance with the Code, all directors submit 
themselves for annual re-election by shareholders at each AGM. 

Limits on the number of shares used to 
satisfy share awards (dilution limits)
All of the Group’s incentive schemes that contain an element that 
may be satisfied in IP Group shares incorporate provisions that 
in any ten-year period (ending on the relevant date of grant), the 
maximum number of the Shares that may be issued or issuable 
under all such schemes shall not exceed 10% of the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company from time to time.

The Committee regularly monitors the position and prior to 
the making of any share-based award considers the effect 
of potential vesting of outstanding awards to ensure that the 
Company remains within these limits. Any awards which are 
required to be satisfied by market purchased shares are excluded 
from such calculations. No treasury shares were held or utilised 
in the year ended 31 December 2014.

As at 31 December 2014, the Company’s headroom position, 
which remains within such guidelines, was as shown in the chart 
below.

Consideration by the Directors of matters 
relating to directors’ remuneration
The full terms of reference of the Committee, which are 
reviewed annually, are available on the Group’s website at  
www.ipgroupplc.com. In summary, the Remuneration 
Committee has specific responsibility for advising the Group’s 
Board on the remuneration and other benefits of executive 
directors, an overall policy in respect of remuneration of other 
employees of the Group and establishing the Group’s policy with 
respect to employee incentivisation schemes. 

The Remuneration Committee currently comprises the following 
independent non-executive directors whose backgrounds and 
experience are summarised on pages 46 and 47:

Francis Carpenter (Chair, until retirement on 1 July 2014) 
Mike Humphrey (Chair, from 1 July 2014) 
Jonathan Brooks 
Doug Liversidge (from 1 July 2014) 
Lynn Gladden (from 1 July 2014)

Committee meetings are administered and minuted by the 
Company Secretary. In addition, the Committee received 
assistance from the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Executive 
Officer who attend meetings by invitation, except when matters 
relating to their own remuneration are being discussed.

During the year, the key activities carried out by the Committee 
were:

 ■ Consideration of the Group’s overall remuneration structure 
to ensure it continues to promote the Group’s strategy, 
including the blend of fixed and short and longer term variable 
pay.

 ■ Consideration of the skills and experience of the Executive 
Directors and carrying out of benchmarking in order to 
determine base salaries for the period 1 April 2014 to 31 March 
2015 and giving further consideration to base salaries with 
effect from 1 April 2015.

 ■ Consideration of LTIP awards and vesting targets for 2013 and 

2014 and outturns for 2011.

 ■ Consideration of AIS awards, vesting targets and outturns for 

2014.

 ■ Consideration of longer term incentive scheme for possible 
implementation in 2015 for various members of the Group’s 
staff.

 ■ Review of the Group’s Remuneration Policy.

 ■ Approval of the Group’s DRR.

1.77%

1.16%

5.92%

0.12%

0.40%

0.64%

Vested LTIP awards in 
past 10 years — Executives

Vested LTIP awards in 
past 10 years — Other staff

Outstanding LTIP and Fusion
IP LTIP awards — Executives

Outstanding LTIP and Fusion
IP LTIP awards —  Other staff

Other share schemes 
(Sharesave, DBSP, etc)

Additional headroom

73

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

External advisers
The Remuneration Committee is authorised, if it wishes, to seek independent specialist services to provide information and advice on 
remuneration at the Company’s expense, including attendance at Committee meetings.

During the year the Remuneration Committee continued its review of executive remuneration and took into consideration 
professional advice from Deloitte LLP in respect of the development of the Group’s Remuneration Policy and its reporting under the 
revised Directors’ Remuneration Reporting Regulations. Deloitte is a founding member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and 
adheres to its Code in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. Fees paid to Deloitte LLP in connection with advice 
to the Committee in 2014 were £19,750. Deloitte LLP also provided advice to the Group in 2013 and 2014 in connection with internal 
and external assessments of the effectiveness of the operation of its Board. In addition, the Committee took advice from MM&K 
Limited in connection with the introduction and structuring of a potential long-term incentive scheme. Fees paid to MM&K in relation 
to 2014 were £16,000.

Statement of shareholder voting
The table below sets out the proxy results of the vote on the Group’s Remuneration Report and Remuneration Policy at the Group’s 
2014 AGM:

Votes for

Votes against

Number

% of votes cast

Number

% of votes cast

Votes cast

Votes withheld

Remuneration Report

Remuneration Policy

372,720,408

380,876,152

99.9%

99.9%

480,783

273,305

0.1%

373,204,925

10,906,048

0.1%

381,153,191

2,957,782

Remuneration disclosure
This report complies with the requirements of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups Regulations 2008 as amended in 
2013, the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (September 2012) and the Listing Rules.

74

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Governance Committee ReportsReport of the Audit Committee

Our Governance Committee Reports

Responding to change:  
Audit tender and  
integration of Fusion IP 

The main activities of the Committee 
during 2014 can be seen by referring 
to the summary agenda items overleaf. 
In addition to the normal cycle of 
events, the Committee undertook two 
important additional activities. The first 
of these was the management of the 
audit tender that was concluded in 
April 2014, the second was monitoring 
the integration of Fusion IP plc during 
the year following its acquisition by the 
Group during the first quarter of 2014.

Jonathan Brooks Chairman of the Audit Committee 

Audit Committee responsibilities
The Committee monitors the integrity of the financial  
statements of the Group, and reviews all proposed annual and 
half-yearly results announcements to be made by the Group with 
consideration being given to any significant financial reporting 
judgements contained in them. The Committee also advises the 
Board on whether it believes the annual report and accounts, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 
The Committee also considers internal controls, compliance 
with legal requirements, accounting standards and the Listing, 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct 
Authority, and also reviews any proposed change in accounting 
policies and any recommendations from the Group’s Auditor 
regarding improvements to internal controls and the adequacy of 
resources within the Group’s finance function. 

A full copy of the Committee’s Terms of Reference is available 
from the Company’s website at www.ipgroupplc.com.

Committee membership
Between January 2014 and the AGM, the Committee comprised 
three independent non-executive directors, with myself as Chair. 
As the Chair of the Committee, I am deemed by the Board to 
have recent and relevant financial experience being a Fellow 
of the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants and 
having held senior financial positions in my career. For the first 
half of 2014, the other two members of the Committee were 
Mike Humphrey, who is the Senior Independent Director, and 
Francis Carpenter. At the AGM in May, Francis Carpenter stood 
down and two new independent directors were appointed to 
the Audit Committee: Doug Liversidge, who had previously been 
the Chairman of Fusion IP plc, which the Group acquired in the 
first quarter of the year, and Professor Lynn Gladden, CBE, who is 
Pro-Vice Chancellor of Research at Cambridge University. 

The Committee met four times during the year, with the first two 
meetings comprising three independent Non-executive Directors 
and the third and fourth meetings comprising four independent 
Non-executive Directors.

The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Group 
Financial Controller, and the external auditor were invited to 
attend all of the meetings. At the end of each of the meetings, 
the Committee met with the auditor without any members of the 
executive management team being present. 

75

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comReport of the Audit Committee
continued

Activities during the year
The main activities of the Committee during 2014 can be seen by 
referring to the summary agenda items on the right. In addition 
to the normal cycle of events, the Committee undertook 
two important additional activities. The first of these was the 
management of the audit tender that was concluded in April 
2014, and the second was monitoring the integration of Fusion IP 
plc during the year following its acquisition by the Group in the 
first quarter of 2014. 

In terms of the audit tender, three firms were invited to tender, 
including the incumbent firm, with KPMG LLP emerging as the 
successful firm to be appointed following the Group’s AGM in 
May 2014. The Committee was particularly impressed by the 
proposed team, their grasp of the Group’s business and the 
expertise it was felt they could offer both in terms of the Group’s 
international expansion and also the development of its overall 
systems of control as it grows in complexity.

With respect to the integration of Fusion IP plc, the management 
team was asked to prepare a thorough list of integration tasks 
which was reviewed and approved by the Committee and then 
used to monitor progress at each of its subsequent meetings  
in 2014. 

Summary agendas for Audit committee 
meetings in 2014 

February

 — Full year financial statements and discussions with auditor

 — Fair, balanced and understandable review of Annual Report

 — Audit committee effectiveness review

 — Going concern review

 — Consideration of the need for a formal internal audit function

 — Audit tender process 

 — Review of Audit Committee annual agenda 

May

 — Submission by management of Fusion integration plans

 — Review of Risk Register

 — Planning of internal audit projects

 — MLRO/Compliance officer reports on regulated businesses

 — External review of FCA-authorised businesses

 — Review of Group Treasury Policy

 — Half year results planning with new audit firm

The other activities undertaken by the Committee were the normal 
recurring items, the most important of which are noted below.

August

Valuation of assets and liabilities
This represents the key audit risk for the Group and at 
each reporting event, the Audit Committee discusses with 
management and the auditor the approach that has been taken 
in assessing all key estimates. 

 — Half year financial statements and review with auditor

 — Fusion integration progress report

 — Review of anti-bribery policy and procedures

 — Cyber-security and IT Data update

 — Review of D&O and PI insurances

The most material area of judgement in the financial statements 
relates to the valuation of the unquoted equity investments, 
which at year end had a carrying value of £207.7m. The 
Committee satisfied itself that the portfolio valuations were 
materially correct after considering findings from the year end 
valuations meeting, which was attended by KPMG, receiving 
periodic presentational updates from the sector heads and 
business building team members, and receiving regular written 
reports on the Group’s portfolio companies. 

At year end the fair value of the Group’s intangible assets was 
£16.5m and goodwill was £57.1m. The majority of these balances 
arose from the acquisition of Fusion IP in 2014. The goodwill 
balance is tested annually for impairment. The intangible assets 
are reviewed for impairment indicators and impairment tests 
are performed if any indicators are noted. During the year the 
Committee reviewed a report from the finance team on the 
accounting treatment adopted for the acquisition of Fusion IP, and 
considered the estimates and assumptions made in determining 
the initial fair values of the identified intangible assets and goodwill, 
as well as those assumptions and models used for determining if 
any impairment indicators were present at year end. 

October

 — Review of auditor’s 2014 audit planning document

 — Fusion integration progress report

 — Audit committee’s terms of reference; annual review

 — Whistleblowing policy; annual review of process

 — Investment and divestment policy; annual review

 — Related party transaction policy review

 — Review of risk register and risk appetite 

 — Cyber security update 

 — Group KPI review

 — Discussion on adoption of FRS 101 or 102 for subsidiary 

companies

The change of auditor in 2014 was also very helpful in allowing 
a fresh pair of eyes to examine the methodologies for valuations 
and there has been a very thorough testing of management 
assumptions on the valuation of a very broad range of the 
Group’s investments.

s
t
r
o
p
e
R
e
e
t
t
i

m
m
o
C
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

76

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Governance Committee Reports

Regulatory Compliance
Ensuring compliance for FCA regulated businesses also 
represents an important control risk from the perspective of the 
Audit Committee. An annual review is conducted internally to 
monitor compliance and an external evaluation is also conducted 
by a specialist firm. During the review in 2014, no particular issues 
were identified.

Review of Annual Report and Accounts and Half-
yearly Report 
The Committee carried out a thorough review of the Group’s 
2014 Annual Report and Accounts and its 2014 Half-yearly Report 
resulting in the recommendation of both for approval by the 
Board. In carrying out its review, the Committee gave particular 
consideration to whether the Annual Report, taken as a whole, was 
fair, balanced and understandable, concluding that it was. It did 
this primarily through consideration of the reporting of the Group’s 
business model and strategy, the competitive landscape in which it 
operates, the significant risks it faces, the progress made against its 
strategic objectives and the progress made by, and changes in fair 
value of, its portfolio companies during the year.

Going Concern
Annually, the Committee considers the going concern principle 
on which the financial statements are prepared and also 
considers and approves the impairment review of goodwill 
prepared by management. As a business which seeks to 
establish and invest in new ventures as well as support existing 
investments with further capital, the business model is currently 
inherently cash consuming. Following the placing which took 
place at the start of 2014, the Group has sufficient cash reserves 
to continue to provide capital to its existing portfolio and to 
create and fund new businesses at a similar rate to previous years 
for approximately two years assuming broadly similar levels of 
net operating expenditure and portfolio realisations. An inability 
to raise future funds may require the Group to modify its level of 
capital deployment into the portfolio or to more actively seek to 
realise one or more portfolio company holdings but these would 
not in themselves threaten the viability of the overall business. 

During 2015, the Committee will have a role in supporting the 
Group’s compliance with the revised UK Corporate Governance 
Code, which applies to the Group for the 2015 financial year. 
Amongst other things, the Board will be required to make a 
statement regarding the Group’s longer-term viability and the 
Committee will work with management to ensure that there is a 
robust process in place to support the statement to be made by 
the Board. Similarly, the Committee will work with management 
to ensure that the current processes underpinning its oversight 
of internal controls provide appropriate support for the required 
Board statement on the effectiveness of risk management and 
internal controls.

Risk and internal controls
The key elements of the Group’s internal control framework and 
procedures are set out on pages 56 and 57. The principal risks 
the Group faces are set out on pages 36 to 39. Annually, the 
Audit Committee and the full Board considers the Group risk 
register and related management controls. In addition, during the 
year the Committee considered the Board’s risk appetite towards 
certain of its key strategic priorities for the year.

Throughout this process we:

 ■ Give consideration to whether areas should be looked 

at more closely through internal audit or specific control 
reviews;

 ■ Identify areas where enhancement of internal controls is 

required; and

 ■ Agree action plans to deliver the necessary or recommended 

enhancements.

There is a formal whistleblowing policy which has been 
communicated to employees. This policy provides information 
on the process to follow in the event that any employee feels 
it is appropriate to make a disclosure. The Audit Committee is 
satisfied that the policy provides an adequate basis for employees 
to make representations in confidence to the Group and for 
appropriate and proportionate investigations.

Internal audit
The Group does not maintain a separate internal audit function. 
This is principally due to the size of the Group where close 
control over operations is exercised by a small number of 
executives. The Audit Committee currently considers the 
outsourced provision of internal audit work as both more 
efficient and cost-effective than having its own central internal 
audit team. However, the Audit Committee does review the need 
to have its own separate internal audit function each year. 

The Audit Committee has developed a framework to gain 
assurance over the system of internal financial and operational 
controls. This comprises: 

 ■ A risk assessment performed by operational management and 

the Board to identify key areas for assurance. 

 ■ An annual assessment by the Audit Committee of the whole 

system of internal financial and operational controls.

The Audit Committee considers that a key area of risk in the 
business lies in the Group’s investment and divestment policies and 
processes and during 2013 undertook a review of these processes 
which it updated in 2014. Following the acquisition of Fusion IP 
and the divisionalisation of the Group into sector-focused teams, 
these policies and processes have been further formalised. 

77

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comReport of the Audit Committee
continued

Auditor Independence
A formal statement of independence is received from the auditor 
each year and the Board and the Audit Committee are satisfied 
that the independence of the new auditor, appointed in May 
2014, has been maintained. 

Auditor Effectiveness
The Committee intends to complete its formal assessment of 
the effectiveness of the Group’s new external auditor following 
the completion of the 2014 audit cycle and will report on this 
assessment in the 2015 annual report. Based on the Committee’s 
interactions with the auditor to date, including the speed with 
which the auditor has understood the Group’s business model 
and risks, the quality and scope of their audit planning, their 
approach to asset valuation of the companies in which the 
Group invests, and the half-yearly report review process, it is 
expected that the Committee will conclude that the auditor has 
been effective.

I will be available at the AGM to answer any questions about the 
Committee’s work.

Jonathan Brooks
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
9 March 2015

External audit
The effectiveness of the external audit process is dependent 
on appropriate risk identification. In October, the Committee 
discussed the Auditor’s audit plan for 2014. This included a 
summary of the proposed audit scope and a summary of what 
the Auditor considered to be the most significant financial 
reporting risks facing the Group together with the Auditor’s 
proposed audit approach to these significant risk areas. The 
main areas of audit focus for the year were the valuation of 
investments in portfolio companies, with particular focus on 
unquoted companies, including Oxford Nanopore Technologies 
Limited, the valuation of intangible assets and goodwill, notably 
following the acquisition of Fusion IP and ensuring there had 
been regulatory compliance for those parts of the business 
covered by FCA regulations. 

Appointment and Independence
The Audit Committee advises the Board on the appointment 
of the external auditor and on its remuneration both for audit 
and non-audit work and discusses the nature, scope and results 
of the audit with the external auditor. The Committee keeps 
under review the cost-effectiveness and the independence and 
objectivity of the external auditor. Controls in place to ensure this 
include monitoring the independence and effectiveness of the 
audit, implementing a policy on the engagement of the external 
auditor to supply non-audit services, and a review of the scope 
of the audit and fee and performance of the external auditor. As 
part of this work, as described above, the Committee undertook 
a tender process for the Group’s audit during 2014 that resulted 
in the appointment of KPMG LLP as auditor.

Non-Audit Work
The Audit Committee approves all fees paid to the auditor for 
non-audit work. During 2013 the previous auditor, BDO LLP, 
did perform some non-audit work which mainly consisted 
of tax compliance work for subsidiaries of the Group, as well 
some other statutory filing work. In early 2014 BDO LLP carried 
out financial due diligence on Fusion IP in connection with its 
acquisition by the Group and also acted as reporting accountants 
in connection with the Group’s placing. Since its appointment as 
the Group’s Auditor, KPMG LLP has not undertaken any non-audit 
work, the Committee having preferred to engage other firms to 
perform tax advisory work and other consulting engagements 
to ensure that the independence of the Auditor is not 
compromised. Where appropriate, the Committee may sanction 
the use of KPMG LLP for non-audit services in accordance with 
the Group’s non-audit services policy. An analysis of audit and 
non-audit fees is provided in note 6 to the financial statements 
on page 100. 

s
t
r
o
p
e
R
e
e
t
t
i

m
m
o
C
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

78

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Governance Other Statutory

Directors’ report

Report of the Directors
The Directors present their report together with the audited 
financial statements for IP Group plc and its subsidiaries for the 
year ended 31 December 2014.

Corporate governance statement
Information that fulfils the requirements of the corporate 
governance statement can be found in the Corporate 
Governance report on pages 48 to 57 and is incorporated into 
this Directors’ report by reference.

Results and dividends 
During the period, the Group made an overall profit after taxation 
for the year ended 31 December 2014 of £9.5m (2013: £72.6m 
profit). The directors do not recommend the payment of a 
dividend (2013: £nil). 

Directors
The names of directors who currently hold office or did so during 
2014 are as follows:

Executive Directors
Alan Aubrey 
Mike Townend 
Greg Smith 
David Baynes (appointed with effect from 20 March 2014) 
Charles Winward (resigned on 23 April 2014)

Non-executive Directors
Dr Bruce Smith (Chairman) 
Jonathan Brooks 
Doug Liversidge (appointed with effect from 20 March 2014) 
Prof Lynn Gladden (appointed with effect from 26 March 2014) 
Francis Carpenter (resigned on 01 July 2014)

Details of the interests of directors in the share capital of the 
Company are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on 
page 70.

Principal risks and uncertainties and 
financial instruments 
The Group through its operations is exposed to a number of 
risks. The Group’s risk management objectives and policies are 
described on pages 34 to 39.and in the Corporate Governance 
report on pages 56 and 57. Further information on the Group’s 
financial risk management objectives and policies, including those 
in relation to credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk, is provided in 
note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, along with further 
information on the Group’s use of financial instruments.

Significant agreements
The Group has entered into various agreements to form 
partnerships with 15 UK universities and three US universities. 
In addition, the Group has entered into agreements to act 
as general partner and investment manager to three limited 
partnerships. Further details can be found in the strategic report 
and in the notes to the financial statements.

Share capital and related matters
Details of the structure of the Company’s share capital and the rights 
attaching to the Company’s shares are set out in note 19 to the 
consolidated financial statements. There are no specific restrictions 
on the size of a holding or on the transfer of shares, which are both 
governed by the general provisions of the Company’s Articles of 
Association (the “Articles”) and prevailing legislation.

At the last Annual General Meeting of the Company held on  
13 May 2014 (the “2014 AGM”), authority was given to the 
Directors pursuant to the relevant provisions of the Companies 
Act 2006 to allot unissued relevant securities in the Company 
up to a maximum amount equivalent to approximately one-third 
of the issued ordinary share capital on 7 April 2014 at any time 
up to the earlier of the conclusion of the next Annual General 
Meeting (“AGM”) of the Company and 1 August 2015. In addition, 
at the 2014 AGM, the Directors were also given authority 
effective for the same period as the aforementioned authority 
to allot relevant securities in the Company up to a maximum of 
approximately two-thirds of the total ordinary share capital in 
issue on 7 April 2014 in connection with an offer by way of a fully 
pre-emptive rights issue. The Directors propose to renew both 
of these authorities at the Company’s next AGM to be held on 12 
May 2015. The authorities being sought are in accordance with 
guidance issued by the Investment Association.

A further special resolution passed at the 2014 AGM granted 
authority to the Directors to allot equity securities in the 
Company for cash, without regard to the pre-emption provisions 
of the Companies Act 2006, both: (i) up to a maximum of 
approximately two-thirds of the total ordinary share capital in 
issue on 7 April 2014 in connection with a fully pre-emptive 
rights issue; and (ii) up to a maximum of approximately 5% of the 
aggregate nominal value of the shares in issue on 7 April 2014, 
each authority exercisable at any time up to the earlier of the 
conclusion of the next AGM of the Company and 1 August 2015. 
Neither of these authorities has been used during the year. The 
Directors will seek to renew these authorities for a similar period 
at the next AGM to be held on 12 May 2015.

79

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comRegulation
Top Technology Ventures Limited, a 100%-owned subsidiary of the 
Company, is authorised and regulated by the Financial Conduct 
Authority under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

Post balance sheet events
Material events occurring since the balance sheet date are 
disclosed in the strategic report and in note 27 to the Group 
financial statements.

Disclosure of information to auditor 
Each of the persons who is a director at the date of approval of 
this Annual Report confirms that:

 ■ so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 

information of which the Company’s Auditor is unaware; and

 ■ the Director has taken all steps that he/she ought to have 
taken as a director in order to make himself/herself aware 
of any relevant audit information and to establish that the 
Company’s Auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Companies 
Act 2006.

Appointment of auditor 
Following the audit tender process during the first quarter of 
2014 which concluded with BDO LLP retiring at the 2014 AGM 
and KPMG LLP being appointed in their place, a resolution to 
reappoint KPMG LLP, together with a resolution to authorise the 
Directors to determine their remuneration, will be proposed at 
the 2015 AGM. 

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Angela Leach
Company Secretary
9 March 2015

Directors’ report
continued

Under the Companies Act 2006, the Company has the power 
to purchase its own shares in accordance with Part 18, Chapter 
5 of the Companies Act 2006. At the 2014 AGM, a special 
resolution was passed which granted the Directors authority to 
make market purchases of the Company’s shares pursuant to 
these provisions of the Companies Act 2006 up to a maximum 
of approximately 10% of the Company’s issued share capital on 
7 April 2014 provided that the authority granted set a minimum 
and maximum price at which purchases can be made and is 
exercisable at any time up to the earlier of the conclusion of the 
next AGM and 1 August 2015. This authority has not been used 
during the year. The Directors will seek to renew the authority 
within similar parameters and for a similar period at the next AGM 
to be held on 12 May 2015.

Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles may be amended by a special resolution 
of the shareholders.

Substantial shareholders 
As at 9 March 2015, the Company had been advised of the 
following shareholders with interests of 3% or more in its ordinary 
share capital. Other than as shown, so far as the Company (and 
its Directors) are aware, no other person holds or is beneficially 
interested in a disclosable interest in the Company.
Shareholder

%

Invesco Limited

Lansdowne Partners 

Bailie Gifford & Co 

Woodford Investment Management LLP

Sandaire Limited 

Oppenheimer Funds Inc. (Massachusetts Mutual 
Life Insurance Company)

25.7

15.1

10.5

7.1

5.5

4.3

Political donations 
The Group did not make any political donations during 2014.

Corporate and social responsibility
Details on the Group’s policies, activities and aims with regard 
to its corporate and social responsibilities, including details of 
its greenhouse gas emissions, are included in the Sustainability 
section on pages 40 to 43.

Directors’ indemnity and liability 
insurance
During the year, the Company has maintained liability insurance 
in respect of its Directors. Subject to the provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006, the Articles provide that to the extent that 
the proceeds of any liability insurance are insufficient to meet any 
liability in full, every Director is entitled to be indemnified out of 
the funds of the Company against any liabilities incurred in the 
execution or discharge of his or her powers or duties. A copy 
of the indemnity is available for inspection as required by the 
Companies Act 2006.

y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S
r
e
h
t
O
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

80

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Governance Other Statutory

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
In respect of the Annual Report and the Financial Statements

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ 
from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the Directors 
in respect of the Annual Financial Report
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

 ■ the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or 
loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole; and

 ■ the Directors’ Report includes a fair review of the development 

and performance of the business and the position of the 
issuer and the undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal 
risks and uncertainties that they face.

We consider the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, 
is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman
9 March 2015

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and the Group and parent company financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and parent 
company financial statements for each financial year. Under that 
law they are required to prepare the Group financial statements 
in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU and applicable 
law and have elected to prepare the parent company financial 
statements in accordance with UK Accounting Standards. 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent company 
and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the 
Group and parent company financial statements, the Directors 
are required to: 

 ■ select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently; 

 ■ make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and 

prudent; 

 ■ for the Group financial statements, state whether they have 
been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the 
EU; 

 ■ for the parent company financial statements, state whether 
applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, 
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in 
the parent company financial statements; and 

 ■ prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis 
unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the 
parent company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent 
company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy  
at any time the financial position of the parent company and 
enable them to ensure that its financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006. They have general responsibility for 
taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard 
the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and 
other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also 
responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, 
Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance 
Statement that complies with that law and those regulations. 

81

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comDeliver

To deliver attractive financial returns  
from our assets

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Heading OneOur Financials

Independent auditor’s report 

84 

Group Primary Statements

Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement of  
financial position 

Consolidated statement  
of cash flows 

Consolidated statement of  
changes in equity 

Group Notes

Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 

Company Statements 

Company balance sheet 

Notes to the Company  
financial statements 

Company information 

87

88

89

90

91

117

118

IBC

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Independent auditor’s report

Opinions and conclusions arising from 
our audit
1  Our opinion on the financial statements is 
unmodified 
We have audited the financial statements of IP Group plc for the 
year ended 31 December 2014 which comprise the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated statement 
of financial position, the consolidated statement of cash flows, 
the consolidated statement of changes in equity, the Company 
balance sheet and the related notes. In our opinion: 

 ■ the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 
of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 31 
December 2014 and of the Group’s profit for the year then 
ended; 

 ■ the Group financial statements have been properly prepared 

in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
as adopted by the European Union; 

 ■ the parent Company financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK Accounting Standards; and

 ■ the financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; and, as 
regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation. 

2  Our assessment of risks of material misstatement
In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements 
the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on 
our audit were as follows:

Carrying value of unquoted equity investments (£207.7m)
Refer to page 76 (Audit Committee Report), pages 94 and 95 
(accounting policy) and pages 106 and 107 (financial disclosures).

 ■ The risk – 39.7% of the Group’s total assets (by value) is held in 

investments where no quoted market price is available. 99.8% of 
the unquoted investments are measured at fair value, which is 
established in accordance with International Private Equity and 
Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines. As per the guidelines, the 
Group uses the price of recent investments as the appropriate 
measurement of fair value. The principle risks associated with this 
measurement technique are outlined below:

 ■ There is a risk that recent investments on which fair value 
is based are not sufficiently at arm’s length to ensure an 
independent market valuation representative of fair value. 
Due to the relatively low number of investors partaking in 
funding rounds, this is considered to be a risk to the fair 
value of IP Group’s unquoted investment portfolio.

 ■ Significant events since the recent investment on which 
the fair value is based may indicate that the price of the 
investment, unadjusted, is no longer representative of 
fair value. Due to the nature of the Group’s investment 
portfolio, funding rounds can be more than 12 months 
apart. Whether it remains appropriate to use the price 
of the recent investment depends on the specific 
circumstances of the investment and the stability of the 
external environment.

 ■ Our response – In this area our audit procedures included, 

among others:

 ■ Challenging whether the price of recent investment is an 
appropriate basis for the measurement of the fair value 
applied to year end valuations by assessing the proportion 
of funds raised by external parties in the relevant funding 
rounds.

 ■ For a sample of investments, we enquired through 

discussion with IP Group’s business building team whether 
any events had occurred since the most recent investment 
that may affect the fair value. We independently verified 
the events communicated by IP Group’s business building 
team, for example to external news sources and critically 
assessed these events as potential indicators of fair value 
adjustment.

 ■ We attended the year-end valuation meeting with the 

Directors and certain members of senior finance personnel 
to assess the robustness of the discussion and review of 
the investment valuations.

 ■ We considered the appropriateness, in accordance with 
relevant accounting standards, of the disclosures related 
to unquoted investments. We reviewed the disclosure of 
sensitivities to the valuation.

Fair value of intangible asset on business combination (£21.4m)
Refer to page 76 (Audit Committee Report), page 93 (accounting 
policy) and pages 103 and 115 to 116 (financial disclosures).

 ■ The risk – On acquisition of Fusion IP plc, the Group 

recognised an intangible asset for university agreement 
contracts at fair value. There are a number of assumptions 
made by the directors to determine the fair value of the 
intangible asset including the inflation rate and venture 
capital industry activity adjustment. Determining the fair 
value of the intangible asset is a key judgmental area that our 
audit focused on. There is a risk that the valuation basis and 
assumptions used may not be appropriate. 

 ■ Our response – In this area our audit procedures included, 

among others:

 ■ Critically assessing the appropriateness of the valuation 

basis used by the Group in determining the fair value of the 
intangible asset by reviewing the valuation methodology 
used. 

t
r
o
p
e
R
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
A
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

84

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Financials Auditor’s Report

 ■ We used our own corporate finance specialist to assist us 
in evaluating the assumptions and methodologies used by 
the Group to value the intangible assets acquired. 

 ■ We agreed key assumptions in the valuation model to 
external corroborating information, for example the 
venture capital industry activity (as produced by the British 
Private Equity & Venture Capital Association) and the 
inflation rate used. 

 ■ We also considered the adequacy of the Group’s 

disclosures in respect of the appropriateness of the 
valuation basis used for the intangible asset.

Carrying value of goodwill (£57.1m)
Refer to page 76 (Audit Committee Report), page 93 (accounting 
policy) and pages 102 and 103 and 115 to 116 (financial 
disclosures).

 ■ The risk – IP Group’s impairment review of goodwill involved 
the calculation of value in use through a discounted cash 
flow model and comparison of this amount to the carrying 
value of goodwill recognised in the accounts. The discounted 
cash flow model contained significant levels of judgment 
over the assumptions used including, the discount rate and 
the assumptions to the cash flow forecasts which included 
the disposal and IPO exit valuations, the annual investment 
rate and the weighted average holding period. Due to the 
inherent uncertainty involved in forecasting and discounting 
future cash flows, which are the basis of the assessment of 
recoverability, this is one of the key judgmental areas that our 
audit is concentrated on.

 ■ Our response – In this area our audit procedures included, 

among others:

3  Our application of materiality and an overview of 
the scope of our audit
The materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was 
set at £8m, determined with reference to a benchmark of the 
Group’s total assets as disclosed in the consolidated statement of 
financial position, of £533.1m, of which it represents 1.5%.

In addition, we applied materiality of £784k to revenue from 
services and other income and other administrative expenses, 
for which we believe misstatements of lesser amounts than 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole could be 
reasonably expected to influence the economic decisions of the 
Group taken on the basis of the financial statements.

We report to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected 
identified misstatements relating to the statement of financial 
position exceeding £400k, in addition to other identified 
misstatements that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

Of the Group’s reporting components, we subjected 8 to audits 
for Group reporting purposes. These 8 entities account for 95% 
of the Group’s revenue, 92% of the total profits and losses that 
made up the Group’s profit before tax and 98% of the Group’s 
total assets.

None of the remaining 5% of total Group revenue, 8% of total 
profits and losses that made up Group profit before tax and 2% 
of total Group assets individually represented more than 5% of 
any of total Group revenue, total profits and losses that made up 
Group profit before tax or total Group assets. 

4  Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the 
Companies Act 2006 is unmodified
In our opinion: 

 ■ Critically assessing the principles and integrity of the value 

 ■ the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be 

audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006, and

 ■ the information given in the Strategic Report and the 

Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial 
statements.

in use discounted cash flow model. 

 ■ We used our own corporate finance specialists to assist us 
in evaluating the assumptions and methodologies used by 
the Group, in particular those relating to the discount rate. 

 ■ We reviewed the assumptions around IPO exit valuations 
and agreed the assumptions to historic exit valuations 
achieved for reasonableness. We compared the annual 
investment rate to both historical information and 
company cash flow forecasts for the upcoming year 
for reasonableness. We assessed the weighted average 
holding period for reasonableness by re-calculating the 
holding period of previously disposed investments, those 
being an indicator of future holding periods.

 ■ We considered the sensitivity of the valuation model to the 
key assumptions above through a sensitivity analysis that 
considered the impact of each assumption on the value in 
use.

 ■ We assessed whether the Group’s disclosures of the 

sensitivity of the outcome of the impairment reviews to 
changes in key assumptions reflected the risks inherent in 
the valuation of goodwill.

85

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comIndependent auditor’s report
continued

Scope and responsibilities
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities Statement set out on page 81, the directors  
are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view.  
A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements 
 is provided on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at  
www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate. This report is  
made solely to the company’s members as a body and is  
subject to important explanations and disclaimers regarding  
our responsibilities, published on our website at  
www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2014a, which are 
incorporated into this report as if set out in full and should be 
read to provide an understanding of the purpose of this report, 
the work we have undertaken and the basis of our opinions.

Jonathan Mills (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants  
15 Canada Square  
London 
E14 5GL 
9 March 2015

5  We have nothing to report in respect of the 
matters on which we are required to report by 
exception 
Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required to report to you if, 
based on the knowledge we acquired during our audit, we have 
identified other information in the annual report that contains a 
material inconsistency with either that knowledge or the financial 
statements, a material misstatement of fact, or that is otherwise 
misleading. 

In particular, we are required to report to you if: 

 ■ we have identified material inconsistencies between the 

knowledge we acquired during our audit and the directors’ 
statement that they consider that the annual report and 
financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy; or

 ■ the Report of the Audit Committee does not appropriately 

address matters communicated by us to the audit committee.

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you 
if, in our opinion: 

 ■ adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 

parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or 

 ■ the parent Company financial statements and the part of 

the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 

 ■ certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law 

are not made; or 

 ■ we have not received all the information and explanations we 

require for our audit.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 

 ■ the directors’ statement, set out on page 57, in relation to 

going concern; and 

 ■ the part of the Corporate Governance statement on pages 
48 to 57 relating to the Group’s compliance with the ten 
provisions of the 2012 UK Corporate Governance Code 
specified for our review.

We have nothing to report in respect of the above responsibilities. 

t
r
o
p
e
R
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
A
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

86

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Financials Group Primary Statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments

Profit/(loss) on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Other portfolio income

Licensing Income

Revenue from services and other income

Administrative expenses

Research and development costs

Share-based payment charge

Change in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset

Amortisation of intangible assets

Acquisition costs

Other administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance income — interest receivable

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

Non-controlling interest

Earnings per share

Basic (p)

Diluted (p)

Note

15

22

21

7

9

10

10

2014
£m

20.7

1.6

0.5

0.2

3.0

2.4

28.4

(1.5)

(0.9)

(1.8)

(4.9)

(1.1)

(9.3)

(19.5)

8.9

0.6

9.5

—

9.5

9.1

0.4

9.5

1.97

1.96

2013
£m

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

—

—

2.4

85.4

(0.4)

(0.9)

(5.0)

—

—

(6.9)

(13.2)

72.2

0.4

72.6

—

72.6

73.0

(0.4)

72.6

19.60

19.27

87

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comConsolidated statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2014

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Intangible assets:

  Goodwill

  Acquired intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Oxford Equity Rights asset and related contract costs

Portfolio:

  Equity investments

  Debt investments

Limited and limited liability partnership interests

Other financial asset

Contingent value rights

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity attributable to equity holders

Non-controlling interest

Total equity

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Non-current liabilities

Loans from limited partners of consolidated funds

Contingent loans from university partners

Total equity and liabilities

Registered number: 4204490

Note

2014
£m

2013
£m

11

12

14

15

15

22

17

16

19

18

57.1 

16.5

0.2 

1.3 

18.4 

—

0.2 

3.1 

345.9

283.1 

4.0 

4.6 

— 

1.4

2.8 

4.8 

0.7 

1.4

431.0

314.5

4.8 

30.0 

67.3 

102.1 

533.1 

9.6 

327.6 

12.8 

176.2 

526.2 

—

526.2

2.1 

4.5

0.3

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

24.9 

339.4 

7.5 

150.4 

12.8 

166.3 

337.0 

(0.4)

336.6

1.5 

1.3

—

533.1 

339.4 

The financial statements on pages 87 to 116 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 9 March 2015 and 
were signed on its behalf by:

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S
y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

88

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Operating activities

Profit before taxation

Adjusted for:

Finance income — interest receivable

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

(Profit)/loss on disposal of equity investments

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangible non-current assets

Change in fair value of Oxford equity rights asset

Share-based payment charge

Our Financials Group Primary Statements

2014
£m

2013
£m

9.5

72.6

(0.6)

(20.7)

(0.5)

(1.6)

0.1

4.9

1.8

0.9

(0.4)

(82.4)

(0.8)

0.2

0.1

—

5.0

0.9

Other portfolio income classified as investing activities cash flows

(0.2)

(0.3)

Changes in working capital

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables 

Increase in non-current liabilities

Net cash flow (to)/from deposits

Other operating cash flows

Interest received

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities

Investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of equity and debt investments

Investment in limited and limited liability partnerships

Proceeds from sale of equity investments

Distributions from limited and limited liability partnerships

Proceeds from other financial asset

Other portfolio income received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities

Proceeds from the issue of share capital

Proceeds from acquisition of subsidiary

Net cash inflow from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

(3.2)

(0.5)

3.2

0.1

1.1

1.3

(25.0) 

27.5 

0.5

(31.4)

(0.1)

(46.8)

(0.3)

9.7 

1.1

0.8

0.2

0.7

25.6

—

(27.5)

(0.2)

5.5 

0.2

—

0.1

(35.4)

(21.9)

97.4

17.6

115.0 

48.2 

19.1 

67.3 

—

—

— 

3.7 

15.4 

19.1 

89

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comConsolidated statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Share 
capital
£m

7.3

—

0.2

—

7.5

—

2.0

0.1

—

9.6

Attributable to equity holders of the parent

Share 
premium(i)
£m

150.4

Merger 
reserve(ii) 
£m

12.8

—

—

—

150.4

—

177.2

—

—

—

—

—

12.8

—

—

—

—

327.6

12.8

Retained 
earnings(iii)

£m

92.6

73.0

(0.2)

0.9

166.3

9.1

—

Total
£m

263.1

73.0

—

0.9

337.0

9.1

179.2

(0.1)

—

0.9

176.2

0.9

526.2

Non-controlling

interest(iv)

£m

—

(0.4)

—

—

(0.4)

0.4

—

—

—

—

Total 
equity
£m

263.1

72.6

—

0.9

336.6

9.5

179.2

—

0.9

526.2

At 1 January 2013

Comprehensive income

Issue of equity

Equity settled share 
based payments

At 1 January 2014

Comprehensive income

Issue of equity

Issue of shares in 
connection with LTIP

Equity settled share 
based payments

At 31 December 2014

(i) 

Share premium — Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value, net of directly attributable issue costs.

(ii)  Merger reserve — Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value in relation to the qualifying acquisition of subsidiary undertakings.

(iii)  Retained earnings — Cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income net of associated share-based payments credits.

(iv)  Non-controlling interest — Share of losses attributable to the Limited Partners of IP Venture Fund II L.P. – a consolidated fund which was created in May 2013.

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S
y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

90

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

1. Accounting Policies
Basis of preparation
The Annual Report and Accounts of IP Group plc (“IP Group” or the “Company”) and its subsidiary companies (together, the “Group”) 
are for the year ended 31 December 2014. The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the financial statements 
are set out below. The policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated. These financial 
statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, International Accounting Standards 
and Interpretations (collectively “IFRS”) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) as adopted by the European 
Union (“adopted IFRSs”). 

The preparation of financial statements in compliance with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires 
Group management to exercise judgement in the most appropriate selection of the Group’s accounting policies. The areas where 
significant judgements and estimates have been made in preparing the financial statements and their effect are disclosed in note 3.

Changes in accounting policies

(i) New standards, interpretations and amendments effective from 1 January 2014
Amendment to IFRS 10 — Investment Entities: The amendments define an investment entity and require a parent that is an investment 
entity to measure its investments in particular subsidiaries at fair value through profit or loss, rather than consolidating them in its 
consolidated financial statements. Measurement at fair value through profit or loss must also be applied to an investment entity’s 
separate financial statements. The amendments also introduce disclosure requirements for investment entities into IFRS 12 Disclosure 
of Interests in Other Entities and amend IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements. The Group, after examination, does not qualify for the 
investment entity exemption and consequently the amendment has not resulted in changes to the preparation and presentation of 
the Group’s subsidiaries, associates or Limited Partnerships.

No other new standards, interpretations and amendments effective for the first time from 1 January 2014 have had a material effect 
on the Group’s financial statements.

(ii) New standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective
The following new standards, which have not been applied in these financial statements, will or may have an effect on the Group’s 
future financial statements:

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers: IFRS 15 was issued on 28 May 2014 and provides a single global standard on 
revenue recognition which aligns the IFRS and US GAAP guidance. It replaces existing revenue recognition guidance, including IAS 18 
revenue, IAS 11 Construction Contracts and IFRIC 13 Customer Loyalty Programmes. The Group has assessed the potential impact 
on its consolidated financial statements resulting from the application of IFRS 15 and does not foresee any material effect when 
the Standard is applied. While early adoption is permitted, IFRS 15 has an effective date of 1 January 2017 with the year ending 31 
December 2017 being the first annual financial statements to which the standard applies.

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: IFRS 9 will eventually replace IAS 39 in its entirety. The process has been divided into three main 
components, being classification and measurement; impairment; and hedge accounting. The Group provisionally assesses the 
potential effect to be immaterial given the majority of its financial assets are currently held at fair value through profit or loss. The 
previous effective date of 1 January 2015 has been withdrawn and is now expected to be implemented in 2018.

None of the other new standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective is expected to have a material effect on the 
Group’s future financial statements.

Basis of consolidation

(i) Business Combinations
The Group accounts for business combinations using the acquisition method from the date that control is transferred to the Group (see 
(ii) Subsidiaries below). Both the identifiable net assets and the consideration transferred in the acquisition are measured at fair value at 
the date of acquisition and transaction costs are expensed as incurred. Goodwill arising on acquisitions is tested annually for impairment. 
In instances where the Group owns a non-controlling stake prior to acquisition the step acquisition method is applied, and any gain or 
losses on the fair value of the pre-acquisition holding is recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

(ii) Subsidiaries
Where the Group has control over an entity, it is classified as a subsidiary. As per IFRS 10 an entity is classed as under the control of 
the Group when all three of the following elements are present: power over the entity, exposure to variable returns from the entity 
and the ability of the Group to use its power to affect those variable returns. Control is reassessed whenever facts and circumstances 
indicate that there may be a change in any of these elements of control. 

91

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

1. Accounting Policies continued
In situations where the Company has the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee without holding the majority 
of the voting rights, it considered that de facto control exists. In determining whether de facto control exists the Group considers all 
relevant facts and circumstances, including:

 ■ The size of the Company’s voting rights relative to both the size and dispersion of other parties who hold voting rights;

 ■ Substantive potential voting rights held by the company and by other parties;

 ■ Other contractual arrangements; and 

 ■ Historic patterns in voting attendance.

The consolidated financial statements present the results of the Company and its subsidiaries as if they formed a single entity. 
Intercompany transactions and balances between Group companies are therefore eliminated in full. The consolidated financial 
statements incorporate the results of business combinations using the acquisition method. In the statement of financial position, the 
acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at the acquisition date. The 
results of acquired operations are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the date on which control 
is obtained. They are consolidated until the date on which control ceases.

(iii) Associates
Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence, but does not control, generally accompanied by a shareholding 
of between 20% and 50% of the voting rights.

No associates are presented on the statement of financial position as the Group elects to hold such investments at fair value in the 
statement of financial position. This treatment is permitted by IAS 28 Investment in Associates and Joint Ventures, which permits 
investments held by entities that are akin to venture capital organisations to be excluded from its scope where those investments 
are designated, upon initial recognition, as at fair value through profit or loss and accounted for in accordance with IAS 39 Financial 
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Changes in fair value of associates are recognised in profit or loss in the period of the 
change. The Group has no interests in associates through which it carries on its business.

(iv) Limited partnerships and limited liability partnerships (“Limited Partnerships”)

Limited partnerships
Group entities act as general partner and investment manager to the following limited partnerships:

Name

IP Venture Fund II L.P. (“IPVFII”)

IP Venture Fund (“IPVF”)

The North East Technology Fund L.P. (“NETF”)

Interest in limited 
partnership
%

33.3

10.0

—

The Group receives compensation for its role as investment manager to these limited partnerships including fixed fees and 
performance fees. The Directors consider that these amounts are in substance and form “normal market rate” compensation for its 
role as investment manager. 

In order to determine whether these limited partnerships were required to be consolidated, the presence of the three elements of 
control noted in part (ii) was examined. 

The Group’s significant stake in IPVFII creates a significant exposure to the variability of returns from those interests and the Group’s 
ability to direct the operations of the fund would result in IP Group obtaining the benefits of its activities. As such IPVFII meets the 
criteria in IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements and is consequently consolidated.

In the case of IPVF, the Directors consider that the minority limited partnership interest does not create an exposure of such 
significance that it indicates that the Group acts as anything other than agent for the other limited partners in the arrangement. This is 
further supported by the presence of a strict investment policy and the inability for the general partner to change the restrictive terms 
of that policy other than with agreement of 100% of IPVF’s limited partners.

Similarly, the lack of a stake in NETF indicates the Group’s role as an agent for the limited partner. As a result, the Directors consider 
that the Group does not have the power to govern the operations of theses limited partnerships so as to obtain benefits from their 
activities and accordingly do not meet the definition of a subsidiary under IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. However the 
Group does have the power to exercise significant influence over its limited partnerships and accordingly the Group’s accounting 
treatment for the interest in IPVF is consistent with that of associates as described earlier in this report, i.e. in accordance with IAS 39 
Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement and designated as at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition. 

92

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesLimited liability partnerships
The Group has a 17.8% interest in the total capital commitments of Technikos LLP (“Technikos”). The general partner and investment 
manager of Technikos are parties external to the Group. 

(v) Non-controlling interests
The total comprehensive income, assets and liabilities of non-wholly owned subsidiaries are attributed to owners of the parent and to 
the non-controlling interests in proportion to their relative ownership interests.

Portfolio return and revenue 

Change in fair value
Change in fair value of equity and debt investments represents revaluation gains and losses on the Group’s portfolio of investments. 
Gains on disposal of equity investments represent the difference between the fair value of consideration received and the carrying 
value at the start of the accounting period on the disposal of equity investments. Change in fair value of limited partnership 
investments represents revaluation gains and losses on the Group’s investments in limited partnership funds. Changes in fair values of 
assets do not constitute revenue. 

Revenue from services and other income
All revenue from services is generated within the United Kingdom and is stated exclusive of value added tax. Revenue from services 
and other income comprises:

Advisory fees: Fees earned from the provision of business support services are recognised as the related services are provided. 
Corporate finance advisory fees are generally earned as a fixed percentage of total funds raised and recognised at the time the related 
transaction is successfully concluded.

Fund management services: Fiduciary fund management fees are generally earned as a fixed percentage of total funds under 
management and are recognised as the related services are provided.

Licence Income: Income from licensing and similar income is recognised on an accruals basis in accordance with the terms of 
the relevant licensing agreements. Income from milestone income is recognised once performance obligations are satisfied, on an 
accruals basis and in accordance with the terms of the relevant licensing agreements.

Dividends: Dividends receivable from equity shares are included within other portfolio income and recognised on the ex-dividend date 
or, where no ex-dividend date is quoted, are recognised when the Group’s right to receive payment is established.

Property, plant and equipment
All property, plant and equipment is shown at cost less subsequent depreciation and impairment. Cost includes expenditure that is 
attributable to the acquisition of the items. Depreciation on assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the cost of 
each asset to its residual value over its estimated useful life, as follows:

Fixtures and fittings

Over 3 to 5 years

Computer equipment

Over 3 to 5 years

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each reporting date.

Intangible assets

Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the acquired subsidiary 
at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets and allocated from the acquisition 
date to each of the Group’s cash-generating units (“CGUs”) that are expected to benefit from the business combination. Goodwill may 
be allocated to CGUs in both the acquired business and in the existing business.

Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets represents contractual arrangements and memorandums of understanding with four UK universities acquired 
through acquisition of a subsidiary. At the date of acquisition the cost of these intangibles as a share of the larger acquisition was 
calculated and subsequently the assets are held at amortised cost.

Impairment of intangible assets (including goodwill)
Goodwill is not subject to amortisation but is tested for impairment annually and whenever events or circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. Assets that are subject to amortisation are tested for impairment when events or a change 
in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by 
which the carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs 
to sell and the value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairments, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are 
identifiable cash flows (i.e. CGUs).

93

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

1. Accounting Policies continued
Financial assets
In respect of regular way purchases or sales, the Group uses trade date accounting to recognise or derecognise financial assets.

Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the assets have expired or the Group has transferred 
substantially all risks and rewards of ownership.

The Group classifies its financial assets into one of the categories listed below, depending on the purpose for which the asset was 
acquired. None of the Group’s financial assets are categorised as held to maturity or available for sale. 

(i) At fair value through profit or loss
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are either financial assets held for trading or financial assets which are designated at 
fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition. 

This category includes equity investments, debt investments, equity rights, contingent value rights and investments in limited 
partnerships. Investments in associated undertakings, which are held by the Group with a view to the ultimate realisation of capital 
gains, are also categorised as at fair value through profit or loss. This measurement basis is consistent with the fact that the Group’s 
performance in respect of investments in equity investments, limited partnerships and associated undertakings is evaluated on a fair 
value basis in accordance with an established investment strategy. 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognised at fair value and any gains or losses arising from subsequent 
changes in fair value are presented in profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income in the period which they arise.

Fair value hierarchy
The Group classifies financial assets using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making the related 
fair value measurements. The level in the fair value hierarchy, within which a financial asset is classified, is determined on the basis of 
the lowest level input that is significant to that asset’s fair value measurement. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:

Level 1 — Quoted prices in active markets.

Level 2 — Inputs other than quoted prices that are observable, such as prices from market transactions. These are mainly based on 
prices determined from recent investments in the last twelve months.

Level 3 — One or more inputs that are not based on observable market data.

Equity Investments
The fair values of quoted investments are based on bid prices in an active market at the reporting date. The fair value of unlisted 
securities is established using valuation techniques. These include the use of recent arm’s length transactions, discounted cash flow 
analysis and earnings multiples. Wherever possible the Group uses valuation techniques which make maximum use of market-based 
inputs. Accordingly, the valuation methodology used most commonly by the Group is the ‘price of recent investment’ contained in 
the International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines (the “IPEVCV Guidelines”) endorsed by the British & European 
Venture Capital Associations. The following considerations are used when calculating the fair value of unlisted securities:

Cost
Where the investment being valued was itself made recently, its cost may provide a good indication of fair value unless there is 
objective evidence that the investment has since been impaired, such as observable data suggesting a deterioration of the financial, 
technical, or commercial performance of the underlying business.

Price of recent investment
The Group considers that fair value estimates, which are based entirely on observable market data, will be of greater reliability 
than those based on assumptions and, accordingly, where there has been any recent investment by third parties, the price of that 
investment will generally provide a basis of the valuation. The length of period for which it remains appropriate to use the price of 
recent investment depends on the specific circumstances of the investment and the stability of the external environment.

Given the nature of the Group’s investments in seed, start-up and early-stage companies, where there are often no current and no 
short-term future earnings or positive cash flows, it can be difficult to gauge the probability and financial impact of the success or 
failure of development or research activities and to make reliable cash flow forecasts. Consequently, the most appropriate approach 
to determine fair value is a methodology that is based on market data, that being the price of a recent investment. Where the Group 
considers that the price of recent investment, unadjusted, is no longer relevant and there are limited or no comparable companies or 
transactions from which to infer value, the Group carries out an enhanced assessment based on milestone analysis and/or industry 
and sector analysis. In applying the milestone analysis approach to investments in companies in early or development stages the 
Group seeks to determine whether there is an indication of change in fair value based on a consideration of performance against any 
milestones that were set at the time of the original investment decision, as well as taking into consideration the key market drivers of 
the investee company and the overall economic environment. 

94

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesWhere the Group considers that there is an indication that the fair value has changed, an estimation is made of the required amount 
of any adjustment from the last price of recent investment. Wherever possible, this adjustment is based on objective data from the 
investee company and the experience and judgement of the Group. However, any adjustment is, by its very nature, subjective. Where 
a deterioration in value has occurred, the Group reduces the carrying value of the investment to reflect the estimated decrease. If 
there is evidence of value creation the Group may consider increasing the carrying value of the investment; however, in the absence 
of additional financing rounds or profit generation it can be difficult to determine the value that a purchaser may place on positive 
developments given the potential outcome and the costs and risks to achieving that outcome and accordingly caution is applied. 

Factors that the Group considers include, inter alia, technical measures such as product development phases and patent approvals, 
financial measures such as cash burn rate and profitability expectations, and market and sales measures such as testing phases, 
product launches and market introduction. 

Other valuation techniques
If there is no readily ascertainable value from following the ‘price of recent investment’ methodology, or there is objective evidence 
that a deterioration in fair value has occurred since a relevant transaction, the Group considers alternative methodologies in the 
IPEVCV Guidelines such as discounted cash flows (”DCF”) or price-earnings multiples. DCF involves estimating the fair value of 
a business by calculating the present value of expected future cash flows, based on the most recent forecasts in respect of the 
underlying business. Given the difficulty of producing reliable cash flow forecasts for seed, start-up and early-stage companies as 
described earlier, this methodology is generally used as a confirmatory indicator of the level of any adjustment that may need to be 
made to the last price of recent investment. 

When using the earnings multiple methodology, earnings before interest and tax (“EBIT”) are generally used, adjusted to a maintainable 
level. A suitable earnings multiple is derived from an equivalent business or group of businesses, for which the average price-earnings 
multiple for the relevant sector index can generally be considered a suitable proxy. This multiple is applied to earnings to derive an 
enterprise value which is then discounted by up to 60% for non-marketability and other risks inherent to businesses in early stages  
of operation. 

No reliable estimate
Where a fair value cannot be estimated reliably, the investment is reported at the carrying value at the previous reporting date unless 
there is objective evidence that the investment has since been impaired.

Equity rights
The equity rights asset represents consideration paid to the University of Oxford between December 2000 and June 2001 that gives 
the Group contractual rights to the receipt of shares in unlisted spin-out companies (or cash) based on research carried out in the 
university’s Department of Chemistry. It is considered to be a derivative financial asset and is designated as at fair value through profit 
and loss. Further details on the treatment of this asset are included in note 14.

Debt investments
Debt investments are generally unquoted debt instruments which are convertible to equity at a future point in time. Such instruments 
are considered to be hybrid instruments containing a fixed rate debt host contract with an embedded equity derivative. The Group 
designates the entire hybrid contract at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition and, accordingly, the embedded 
derivative is not separated from the host contract and accounted for separately. The fair value of debt investments is established by 
calculating the present value of expected future cash flows associated with the instrument.

Contingent value rights
In instances where the Group receives contingent financial consideration upon the disposal of a financial asset, the resulting asset 
shall be recognised and designated as at fair value through profit and loss, and treated accordingly.

(ii) Loans and receivables
These assets are non-derivative financial assets with fixed and determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market. They 
arise principally through the provision of services to customers (trade receivables) and are carried at cost less provision for impairment.

Deposits
Deposits comprise longer-term deposits held with financial institutions with an original maturity of greater than three months.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents include cash in hand and short-term deposits held with financial institutions with an original maturity of 
three months or less.

95

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

1. Accounting Policies continued
Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities are composed of trade payables and other short-term monetary liabilities, which are recognised at amortised cost.

Unless otherwise indicated, the carrying amounts of the Group’s financial liabilities are a reasonable approximation to their fair value.

Share capital
Financial instruments issued by the Group are treated as equity if the holders have only a residual interest in the Group’s assets after 
deducting all liabilities. The objective of the Group is to manage capital so as to provide shareholders with above average returns 
through capital growth over the medium to long term. The Group considers its capital to comprise its share capital, share premium, 
merger reserve and retained earnings.

Top Technology Ventures Limited, a Group subsidiary, is subject to external capital requirements imposed by the Financial Conduct 
Authority (“FCA”) and as such must ensure that it has sufficient capital to satisfy these requirements. The Group ensures it remains 
compliant with these requirements as described in the financial statements of Top Technology Ventures Limited.

Employee benefits

(i) Pension obligations
The Group operates a company defined-contribution pension scheme for which all employees are eligible. The assets of the scheme 
are held separately from those of the Group in independently administered funds. The Group currently makes contributions on behalf 
of staff to this scheme or to employee personal pension schemes on an individual basis. The Group has no further payment obligations 
once the contributions have been paid. The contributions are recognised as employee benefit expenses when they are due.

(ii) Share-based payments
The Group engages in equity-settled share-based payment transactions in respect of services receivable from employees, by granting 
employees conditional awards of ordinary shares subject to certain vesting conditions. 

Conditional awards of shares are made pursuant to the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards and/or the Group’s Annual 
Incentive Scheme (“AIS”). The fair value of the shares is estimated at the date of grant, taking into account the terms and conditions of 
the award, including market-based performance conditions. 

The difference between the fair value of the employee services received in respect of the shares granted and the price payable is 
recognised as an expense over the appropriate performance and vesting period. The corresponding credit is recognised in retained 
earnings within total equity. The fair value of services is calculated using the market value on the date of award and is adjusted for 
expected and actual levels of vesting. Where conditional awards of shares lapse the expense recognised to date is credited to the 
statement of comprehensive income in the year in which they lapse.

Where the terms for an equity-settled award are modified, and the modification increases the total fair value of the share-based 
payment, or is otherwise beneficial to the employee at the date of modification, the incremental fair value is amortised over the 
vesting period.

Deferred tax
Full provision is made for deferred tax on all temporary differences resulting from the carrying value of an asset or liability and its tax 
base. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or deferred tax liability settled. Deferred tax assets are recognised 
to the extent that it is probable that the deferred tax asset will be recovered in the future.

Leases
Leases where the lessor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as operating leases. Payments 
made under operating leases are charged to administrative expenses in the statement of comprehensive income on a straight-line 
basis over the term of the lease.

2. Financial Risk Management
As set out in the Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 34 to 39, the Group is exposed, through its normal operations, to a 
number of financial risks, the most significant of which are market, liquidity and credit risks. 

In general, risk management is carried out throughout the Group under policies approved by the Board of Directors. The following 
further describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks and the methods used to measure them. 
Further quantitative information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements.

96

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group Notes(a) Market risk

(i) Price risk
The Group is exposed to equity securities price risk as a result of the equity and debt investments, and investments in limited 
partnerships held by the Group and categorised as at fair value through profit or loss.

The Group mitigates this risk by having established investment appraisal processes and asset monitoring procedures which are subject 
to overall review by the Board. The Group has also established corporate finance and communications teams dedicated to supporting 
portfolio companies with fundraising activities and investor relations.

The Group holds investments which are publicly traded on AIM (18 companies) or ISDX (1 company) and investments which are not 
traded on an active market.

The net increase in fair value of the Group’s equity and debt investments during 2014 of £20.7m represents a 7% change against 
the opening balance (2013: net increase of £82.4m, 45%) and a similar increase or decrease in the prices of quoted and unquoted 
investments is considered to be reasonably possible. The table below summarises the impact of a 1% increase/decrease in the price of 
both quoted and unquoted investments on the Group’s post-tax profit for the year and on equity.

Quoted
£m

2014
Unquoted
£m

Equity investments and investments in 
limited partnerships

1.4

2.1

Total
£m

3.5

Quoted
£m

2013
Unquoted
£m

1.4

1.5

Total
£m

2.9

(ii) Interest rate risk
As the Group has no significant borrowings, it has only a limited interest rate risk. The primary impact to the Group is the impact on 
income and operating cash flow as a result of the interest-bearing deposits and cash and cash equivalents held by the Group.

The Group mitigates this risk, in co-ordination with liquidity risk, by managing its proportion of fixed to floating rate financial assets. 
The table below summarises the interest rate profile of the Group.

Financial assets

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Limited and limited liability partnership 
interests

Contingent value rights

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Other financial assets

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Financial liabilities

Trade payables

Other accruals and deferred income

Loans from limited partners of 
consolidated funds

2014

Fixed
rate 
£m

Floating 
rate
£m

Interest 
free
£m

Total
£m

Fixed rate
£m

2013

Floating 
rate
£m

Interest 
free
£m

—

—

0.2

—

—

30.0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

67.3

—

—

—

1.1

1.1

345.9

345.9

3.8

4.6

1.4

—

—

—

4.8

—

4.0

4.6

1.4

30.0

67.3

—

4.8

—

—

—

0.6

—

—

5.0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

19.1

—

—

—

2.9

283.1

2.2

4.8

1.4

—

—

0.7

0.4

0.4

Total
£m

2.9

283.1

2.8

4.8

1.4

5.0

19.1

0.7

0.4

0.4

30.2

67.3

361.6

459.1

5.6

19.1

295.9

320.6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(1.5)

(0.6)

—

(2.1)

(1.5)

(0.6)

—

(2.1)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.1)

(1.4)

(1.3)

(2.8)

(0.1)

(1.4)

(1.3)

(2.8)

At 31 December 2014, if interest rates had been 1% higher/lower, post-tax profit for the year, and other components of equity, would 
have been £0.7m (2013: £0.2m) higher/lower as a result of higher interest received on floating rate cash deposits.

97

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

2. Financial Risk Management continued
(b) Liquidity risk
The Group seeks to manage liquidity risk, to ensure sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs and to invest cash assets 
safely and profitably. The Group’s Treasury Management Policy asserts that at any one point in time no more than 60% of the Group’s 
cash and cash equivalents will be placed in fixed-term deposits with a holding period greater than three months. Accordingly, the 
Group only invests working capital in short-term instruments issued by reputable counterparties. The Group continually monitors 
rolling cash flow forecasts to ensure sufficient cash is available for anticipated cash requirements.

(c) Credit risk
The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its deposits, cash and cash equivalents, debt investments and trade receivables. The 
Group seeks to mitigate its credit risk on cash and cash equivalents by making short-term deposits with counterparties, or by investing 
in treasury funds with an “AA” credit rating or above managed by institutions. Short-term deposit counterparties are required to have 
most recently reported total assets in excess of £3bn and, where applicable, a prime short-term credit rating at the time of investment 
(ratings are generally determined by Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s). Moody’s prime credit ratings of “P1”, “P2” and “P3” indicate 
respectively that the rating agency considers the counterparty to have a “superior”, “strong” or “acceptable” ability to repay short-term 
debt obligations (generally defined as having an original maturity not exceeding 13 months). An analysis of the Group’s deposits and 
cash and cash equivalents balance analysed by credit rating as at the reporting date is shown in the table below. All other financial 
assets are unrated. 

Credit rating

P1

P2

AA

Total deposits and cash and cash equivalents

2014
£m

68.7

28.6

—

97.3 

2013
£m

14.2

9.9

—

24.1

The Group has no significant concentration of credit risk, with exposure spread over a large number of counterparties and 
customers. The Group has detailed policies and strategies which seek to minimise these associated risks including defining maximum 
counterparty exposure limits for term deposits based on their perceived financial strength at the commencement of the deposit. The 
maximum single counterparty limit for deposits at 31 December 2014 was £25m (2013: £10m). 

The Group’s exposure to credit risk on debt investments is managed in a similar way to equity price risk, as described earlier, through 
the Group’s investment appraisal processes and asset monitoring procedures which are subject to overall review by the Board.

The maximum exposure to credit risk for debt investments, receivables and other financial assets is represented by their carrying 
amount.

3. Significant Accounting Estimates and Judgements
The Directors make judgements and estimates concerning the future. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are 
based on historical experience and other factors, such as expectations of future events, and are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The estimates and assumptions, which have the most significant effects 
on the carrying amounts of the assets and liabilities in the financial statements, are discussed below.

(i) Valuation of unquoted equity investments
The judgements required, in order to determine the appropriate valuation methodology of unquoted equity investments, have a 
significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities. These judgements include making 
assessments of the future earnings potential of portfolio companies, appropriate earnings multiples to apply, and marketability and 
other risk discounts.

(ii) Impairment of goodwill
The Group is required to test, at least annually, whether goodwill has suffered any impairment. The recoverable amount is determined 
using a number of value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sell calculations. The use of these methods requires the estimation of 
future cash flows, and the selection of a suitable discount rate, in order to calculate the present value of these cash flows as well as 
the selection of applicable and reasonable multiples.

98

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group Notes(iii) Acquired Intangible Assets
At the date of its acquisition by IP Group, Fusion IP had contractual arrangements with four UK universities. The Group separately 
recognised each of these contractual arrangements as an intangible asset at its fair value at acquisition date. As the intangible assets are 
not quoted on an active market, the fair value at acquisition date was determined by averaging the inflation- and venture capital industry 
activity-adjusted true cost of all university contracts that IP Group was aware of and that have had costs associated with those contracts. 

As the contractual agreements are for a finite term, the intangible assets are subsequently measured at amortised cost. Amortisation 
will occur over the remaining term (or useful life) of each contractual arrangement with each of the four universities.

Discussion of sensitivity analyses is included in the relevant note for each of the above estimates and judgements.

4. Revenue from Services
All revenue from services is derived from either the provision of advisory and venture capital fund management services or the 
licensing of internally developed therapeutic compounds.

5. Operating Segments
For both the year ended 31 December 2014 and the year ended 31 December 2013, the Group’s revenue and profit/loss before 
taxation were derived almost entirely from its principal activities within the UK. Though the Group has initiated operations in the 
US, the associated revenues and costs are currently immaterial and accordingly no additional geographical disclosures are given. 
For management reporting purposes, the Group is currently organised into three operating segments: (i) the commercialisation 
of intellectual property via the formation of long-term partner relationships with universities; (ii) the management of venture funds 
focusing on early-stage UK technology companies; and (iii) the in-licensing of drugable intellectual property from research intensive 
institutions. These activities are described in further detail in the Strategic report on pages 01 to 43.

Year ended 31 December 2014

STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments 

Gain on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Other portfolio income

Licensing Income

Revenue from services and other income

Revenue from fund management services

Change in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset

Amortisation of intangible assets

Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance income – interest receivable

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Assets

Liabilities

Net assets

Other segment items

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

University 
partnership 
business
£m

Venture 
capital fund 
management
£m

In-licensing 
activity 
£m

Consolidated
£m

20.7

1.6

0.5

0.2

—

0.8

—

(1.8)

(4.9)

(9.5)

7.6

0.6

8.2

—

8.2

520.6

(5.8)

514.8

(0.1)

(0.1)

—

—

—

—

—

0.3

1.3

—

—

(1.4)

0.2

—

0.2

—

0.2

9.4

(0.1)

9.3

—

—

—

—

—

—

3.0

—

—

—

—

(1.9)

1.1

—

1.1

—

1.1

3.1

(1.0)

2.1

—

—

20.7

1.6

0.5

0.2

3.0

1.1

1.3

(1.8)

(4.9)

(12.8)

8.9

0.6

9.5

—

9.5

533.1

(6.9)

526.2

(0.1)

(0.1)

99

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

University 
partnership 
business
£m

Venture 
capital fund 
management
£m

In-licensing 
activity 
£m

Consolidated
£m

5. Operating Segments continued

Year ended 31 December 2013

STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments 

Loss on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Revenue from advisory services and other portfolio income

Revenue from fund management services

Change in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset

Administrative expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance income – interest receivable

Profit/(loss) before taxation

Taxation

Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive income for the year

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Assets

Liabilities

Net assets

Other segment items

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

0.8

—

(5.0)

(6.9)

71.9

0.4

72.3

—

72.3

332.8

(1.3)

331.5

—

0.1

—

—

—

0.3

1.3

—

(0.8)

0.8

—

0.8

—

0.8

6.4

(1.4)

5.0

—

—

6. Auditor’s Remuneration
Details of the auditor’s remuneration are set out below:

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts 

The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries, pursuant to legislation 

Total fees for audit services

Audit-related assurance services 

Total assurance services

Tax compliance services 

Taxation advisory services

All other services 

Total non-assurance services

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.5)

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

0.2

(0.1)

0.1

—

—

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

1.1

1.3

(5.0)

(8.2)

72.2

0.4

72.6

—

72.6

339.4

(2.8)

336.6

—

0.1

2014
£000 

2013
£000 

70

94

164

33

197

—

—

—

—

197

64

36

100

23

123

46

26

7

79

202

During 2014, KPMG LLP was appointed as auditor of IP Group plc to replace BDO LLP. BDO LLP remain engaged by the Group as tax 
advisors.

s
e
t
o
N
p
u
o
r
G
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

100

IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014

IP Group 2014 AR - proof 7  Section Re-print ADJUSTED.indd   100

08/05/2015   10:39:14

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015

 
 
 
7. Profit/(loss) From Operations
Profit/(loss) from operations has been arrived at after charging:

Amortisation of intangible assets

Depreciation of tangible assets

Employee costs (see note 8)

Operating leases — property

Profit/(loss) on disposal of equity investments

8. Employee Costs
Employee costs (including Directors) comprise:

Salaries

Defined contribution pension cost

Share-based payment charge (see note 21)

Equity bonuses (released)/accrued in the year

Social security

2014
£m

(4.9)

(0.1)

(6.1) 

(0.4)

1.6

2014
£m

4.4 

0.3 

0.9 

(0.1)

0.6

6.1

2013
£m

—

(0.1) 

(5.1) 

(0.4) 

(0.2)

2013
£m

3.7 

0.1 

0.9 

—

0.4

5.1

The average monthly number of persons (including Executive Directors) employed by the Group during the year was 49, all of whom 
were involved in management and administration activities (2013: 35). Details of the Directors’ remuneration can be found in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 74.

9. Taxation

Current tax

Deferred tax

The amount for the year can be reconciled to the profit per the statement of comprehensive income as follows:

Profit before tax

Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 21.5% (2013: 23.5%)

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Non taxable income

Fair Value movement on investments qualifying for SSE

Movement on share based payments

Unrecognised other temporary differences

Movement in tax losses arising not recognised

Tax credit

2014
£m

—

—

2014
£m

9.5

2.0

1.3

—

(3.4)

(1.0)

(2.1)

3.2

—

2013
£m

—

—

2013
£m

72.6

16.9

—

(19.9)

—

—

—

3.0

—

At 31 December 2014, deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses, for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised, 
totalled £62.7m (2013: £53.0m). An analysis is shown below:

Share-based payment costs

Unused tax losses

2014

2013

Amount 
£m

Deferred tax 
£m

Amount 
£m

Deferred tax 
£m

5.0

57.7

62.7

1.0

11.5

12.5

13.7

39.3

53.0

2.7

7.9

10.6

101

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

9. Taxation continued
At 31 December 2014, deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses, for which a deferred tax asset/(liability) has been 
recognised, totalled £nil (2013: £nil). An analysis is shown below:

Temporary timing differences

Unused tax losses

10. Earnings Per Share
Earnings

Earnings for the purposes of basic and dilutive earnings per share

Number of shares

2014

2013

Amount 
£m

Deferred tax 
£m

Amount 
£m

Deferred tax 
£m

11.3

(11.3)

—

2.3

(2.3)

—

—

—

—

2014
£m

9.1

—

—

—

2013
£m

73.0

2014
Number of 
shares

2013
Number of 
shares

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

462,466,944

372,513,387

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:

Long-Term Incentive Plan 

2,523,968

6,515,903 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

464,990,912 

379,029,290 

The Group has only one class of potentially dilutive ordinary share. These are contingently issuable shares arising under the  
Group LTIP. 

11. Goodwill

At 1 January 2013

At 1 January 2014

Recognised on acquisition of subsidiary (see note 26)

At 31 December 2014

£m

18.4

18.4

38.7

57.1

The Group conducts annual impairment tests on the carrying value of goodwill, based on the recoverable amount of the CGUs to 
which the goodwill has been allocated. The goodwill allocated to each CGU is summarised in the table below. A number of both 
value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sell calculations are used to assess the recoverable values of the CGUs, details of which are 
specified below.

University partnership CGU

Fund management CGU

2014
£m

55.0

2.1

57.1

2013
£m

16.3

2.1

18.4

Impairment review of venture capital fund management CGU
The key assumptions of the DCF model used to assess the value in use, and the range of multiples applied in calculating the  
fair-value-less-costs-to-sell based on a percentage of assets under management are shown below:

Discount rate

Number of funds under management

Management fee

Cost inflation

Percentage of assets under management

2014

2013

9%–11%

9%–11%

3

3

2%–3.5%

2%–3.5%

3%

2%–7%

3%

2%-7%

A number of different value-in-use models were assessed in order to evaluate the recoverable value of the CGU, none of which 
resulted in an impairment being required.

102

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesImpairment review of the university partnership CGU
The key assumptions of the DCF models used to assess the value in use are shown below.

For the purposes of impairment testing, the university partnership CGU comprises those elements connected with the Group’s 
university partnership business other than those that specifically relate to the Group’s contract with the University of Oxford’s 
Department of Chemistry (see note 14). The Directors consider that for each of the key variables which would be relevant in 
determining a recoverable value for the university partnership CGU, there is a range of reasonably possible alternative values. The key 
variable ranges are set out below:

Number of spin-out companies per year 

Annual investment rate

Rate of return achieved

Initial equity stake acquired by the Group under the university partnership

Proportion of spin-out companies failing

Weighted average holding period (years)

Dilution rates prior to exit as a result of financing for spin-out companies 

Proportion of IPO exits

IPO exit valuations

Proportion of disposal exits

Disposal valuations

Discount rate

2014
£m

10–15

2013
£m

7-10

£40m–£60m £20m-£35m

18%–22%

18%-22%

15%–35%

12%–30%

32%–45%

32%–45%

3–5

3-5

40%–60%

40%–60%

25%–35%

25%–35%

£30m–£40m £35m–£45m

28%–32%

28%–32%

£25m–£35m £25m–£35m

9%–11%

9%–11%

When determining the key variables management has, where possible and appropriate, used historical performance data as a basis. 
In instances where the forecasted volumes and scale of activity do not align with the Group’s prior performance, management 
applies its judgement in determining said variables. A number of different value-in-use models were assessed in order to evaluate the 
recoverable value of the CGU, none of which resulted in an impairment being required.

12. Intangible Assets

Cost

At 1 January 2014

Additions through acquisition of subsidiary (see note 26)

At 31 December 2014

Accumulated amortisation

At 1 January 2014

Charge for the year

At 31 December 2014

Net book value

At 31 December 2014

At 31 December 2013

Total
£m

—

21.4

21.4

—

4.9

4.9

16.5

—

The intangible assets represents contractual arrangements and memorandums of understanding with four UK universities acquired 
through acquisition of a subsidiary. The contractual arrangements have fixed terms and, consequently, the intangible assets have a 
finite life which align with the remaining terms which, at the end of the period, range from two months to 39 months. The individual 
contractual arrangements are amortised in a straight line over the remainder of their terms with the expense being presented directly 
on the primary statements.

103

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

13. Categorisation of Financial Instruments

Financial assets

At 31 December 2014

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Other financial assets

Contingent value rights

Limited and limited liability partnership interests 

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total

At 31 December 2013

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Other financial assets

Contingent value rights

Limited and limited liability partnership interests

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total

At fair value through profit or loss

Held for trading 
£m

Designated 
upon initial 
recognition 
£m

Loans and 
receivables 
£m

1.3 

—

—

— 

—

—

—

—

—

—

345.9 

4.0 

—

1.4

4.6

—

—

—

1.3 

355.9 

3.1 

—

—

0.7 

—

—

—

—

—

—

283.1 

2.8 

—

1.4

4.8

—

—

—

3.8 

292.1 

—

—

—

—

—

—

4.8 

30.0 

67.3 

102.1 

—

—

—

—

—

—

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

24.9 

Total 
£m

1.3 

345.9 

4.0 

— 

1.4

4.6

4.8 

30.0 

67.3 

459.3 

3.1 

283.1 

2.8 

0.7 

1.4

4.8

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

320.8 

All financial liabilities are categorised as other financial liabilities and recognised at amortised cost.

The Group does not consider that any change in fair value of financial assets in the year is attributable to credit risk (2013: £nil).

All net fair value gains in the year are attributable to financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition 
(2013: all net fair value gains attributable to financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition).

All interest income is attributable to financial assets not classified as fair value through profit and loss.

14. Equity Rights and Related Contract Costs

Equity rights 
£m

Contract costs 
£m

Total 
£m

Cost

At 1 January 2014 and 31 December 2014

19.9

0.5

20.4

Aggregate amortisation and change in fair value of contract costs

At 1 January 2014

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2014

Net book value

At 31 December 2014

At 31 December 2013

104

(17.0)

(1.8)

(18.8)

1.1 

2.9 

(0.3)

—

(0.3)

0.2

0.2

(17.3)

(1.8)

(19.1)

1.3

3.1

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesCost

At 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2013

19.9

0.5

20.4

Aggregate amortisation and change in fair value of contract costs

Equity rights 
£m

Contract costs 
£m

Total 
£m

At 1 January 2013

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2013

Net book value

At 31 December 2013

At 31 December 2012

(12.0)

(5.0)

(17.0)

2.9 

7.9 

(0.3)

—

(0.3)

0.2

0.2

(12.3)

(5.0)

(17.3)

3.1

8.1

Carrying amount of equity rights
Equity rights represent consideration paid to the University of Oxford between December 2000 and June 2001. 

In return for the non-refundable, non-interest bearing, advance totalling £20.1m, the Group has the right to receive from the University 
the following over its 15-year term:

 ■ 50% of the university’s equity shares in any spin-out company, which is created, based on intellectual property created by 

academics that are considered to be part of the Department of Chemistry (i.e. equity instruments in unlisted companies); and 

 ■ 50% of the university’s share of any cash payments received by the university from parties who have licensed intellectual property 

created by academics that are considered to be part of the Department of Chemistry.

The contract expires on 23 November 2015.

The Directors consider that for each of the key variables which would be relevant in determining a fair value for this financial 
instrument, there is a range of reasonably possible alternative values. The key variable ranges are set out below:

Number of spin-out companies per year from University of Oxford’s Department of Chemistry

Initial equity stake acquired by the Group under the equity rights contract

Proportion of spin-out companies failing

Dilution rates prior to exit as a result of financing for spin-out companies 

Proportion of IPO exits

IPO exit valuations

Proportion of disposal exits

Disposal valuations

Discount rate

2014

1

2013

1–2

20%–25%

20%–25%

30%–40%

30%–40%

35%–60%

35%–60%

30%–40%

30%–40%

£30m–£50m £30m–£50m

25%–35%

25%–35%

£30m–£40m £30m–£40m

9%–11%

9%–11%

These key variable ranges result in a wide range of fair value estimates for the equity rights agreement, from £nil to £2.9m using a 
range of reasonably possible variables, with the number of spin-outs being the variable giving rise to the widest variation in estimated 
fair values. In order to calculate a more accurate valuation figure, given the multitude of reliable scenarios generated when altering the 
discounted cash flows variables, a probability weighting expected return method is utilised. Having applied probabilities to the various 
possible scenarios, the method returned an estimated asset value of £1.3m at 31 December 2014 (2013: £3.1m). 

105

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

15. Investment Portfolio

Group

At 1 January 2014

Investments during the year

Acquired with Fusion

Fusion reclassified as subsidiary

Transaction-based reclassifications during the year

Other transfers between hierarchy levels during the year

Disposals

Change in fair value in the year

At 31 December 2014

At 1 January 2013

Investments during the year

Transaction-based reclassifications during the year

Other transfers between hierarchy levels during the year

Disposals

Change in fair value in the year

At 31 December 2013

Level 1

Level 2

Equity 
investments in 
quoted  
spin-out 
companies
£m

Equity 
investments in 
unquoted  
spin-out 
companies
£m

Unquoted debt 
investments  
in spin-out 
companies
£m

Level 3

Equity 
investments in 
unquoted  
spin-out 
companies
£m

135.1 

11.4 

—

(20.5)

— 

20.4

(5.7)

(2.5) 

138.2 

84.6 

9.4 

— 

0.6

(5.6)

46.1 

135.1 

131.0 

32.8 

11.1 

—

3.1

(12.3)

(2.2)

29.7 

193.2 

86.5 

14.1 

3.6

(12.0)

(0.2)

39.0 

131.0 

2.8 

2.6 

2.4 

—

(3.1)

—

—

(0.7)

4.0 

3.9 

4.0 

(3.7)

(0.4)

—

(1.0)

2.8 

17.0 

–

11.4 

—

— 

(8.1) 

—

(5.8)

14.5 

6.8 

–

0.1 

11.8 

—

(1.7)

17.0 

Total
£m

285.9 

46.8 

24.9 

(20.5)

—

—

(7.9)

20.7 

349.9 

181.8 

27.5 

—

—

(5.8)

82.4 

285.9 

Fair values of unquoted spin-out companies classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy have been determined, in part or in full, by 
valuation techniques that are not supported by observable market prices or rates. Investments in 27 companies have been classified as 
Level 3 and the individual valuations for each of these have been arrived at using a variety of valuation techniques and assumptions. 

Where fair values are based upon the most recent market transaction, but that transaction occurred more that twelve months prior to 
the balance sheet date, the investments are classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy. The fair values of investments categorised 
as Level 3 are analysed on a monthly basis to determine business factors which may make the most recent investment rate no longer 
a representation of fair value.

There are no identified unobservable inputs to which the Level 3 fair values would be materially sensitive. This is represented by the 
fact that if the fair value of all Level 3 investments were to decrease by 10%, the net assets figure would decrease by £1.5m, with a 
corresponding increase if the unobservable inputs were to increase by 10%.

For assets and liabilities that are recognised at fair value on a recurring basis, the Group determines whether transfers have occurred 
between levels in the hierarchy by re-assessing categorisation (based on the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value 
measurement as a whole) at the end of each reporting period. Transfers between tiers are then made as if the transfer took place on 
the first day of the period in question except in the cases of transfers between tiers based on an initial public offering (“IPO”) of an 
investment wherein the changes in value prior to the IPO are calculated and reported in tier 2, and those changes post are attributed 
to tier 1.

If the assumptions used in the valuation techniques for the Group’s holding in each company are varied by using a range of possible 
alternatives, there is no material difference to the carrying value of the respective spin-out company. The effect on the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income for the period is also not expected to be material.

106

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesTransfers between Level 2 and 1 occur when a previously unquoted investment undertakes an initial public offering, resulting in its 
equity becoming quoted on an active market. In the current period, transfers of this nature amounted to £20.4m.

Transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 would occur when a quoted investment’s market becomes inactive. There have been no such 
instances in the current period.

Transfers between Level 3 and Level 2 occur when an investment which previously had a most recent investment of over twelve 
months ago undertake an investment, resulting in an observable market rate. In the current period, transfer of this nature amounted to 
£20.5m.

Transfers between Level 2 and Level 3 occur when an investment’s recent investment becomes more than twelve months old, with 
the price becoming deemed unobservable. In the current period, transfers of this nature amounted to £12.4m.

Fair value changes in Level 3 investments have been a loss of £5.8m in the period, recognised in as change in fair value of equity and 
debt investments in the condensed consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Change in fair value in the year

Fair value gains

Fair value losses

The Company’s interests in subsidiary undertakings are listed in note 2 to the Company’s financial statements.

16. Trade and Other Receivables

Trade debtors

Prepayments

Other receivables

2014
£m

63.2

(42.5)

20.7

2014
£m

4.6

0.2

—

4.8

2013
£m

90.3

(7.9)

82.4

2013
£m

0.3

0.1

0.4

0.8

The Directors consider the carrying amount of trade and other receivables to approximate their fair value. All receivables are interest 
free, repayable on demand and unsecured. 

17. Contingent Value Rights
As a result of the disposal of Proximagen Group plc in August 2012, the Group received contingent consideration, in the form of 
contingent value rights (“CVRs”), based upon future net revenues of two associated drug programmes. In line with the Group’s 
policies, these have been recognised as financial assets at fair value through profit and loss, and have been fair valued at £1.4m (2013: 
£1.4m). The Group considers this asset to be Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy throughout the current and previous financial years. If 
the assumptions used in the valuation techniques are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material difference to 
the statement of financial position nor the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

18. Trade and Other Payables
Current liabilities

Trade payables

Social security expenses

Other accruals and deferred income 

Non-current liabilities

Loans drawn down from the Limited Partners of consolidated funds

Contingent loans from university partners

2014
£m

1.3

0.2

0.6

2.1

2014
£m

4.5

0.3

4.8

2013
£m

0.1

0.1

1.3

1.5

2013
£m

1.3

—

1.3

107

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

19. Share Capital

Issued and fully paid:

Ordinary Shares of 2p each

At 1 January

Issued under share placing

Issued under Fusion IP plc acquisition

Issued under employee share plans

At 31 December

2014

2013

Number

£m

Number

375,258,859

60,606,060

39,150,484

4,508,994

479,524,397

7.5

1.2

0.8

0.1

9.6

365,763,664

—

—

9,495,195

375,258,859

£m

7.3

—

—

0.2

7.5

In February 2014, the Group issued 60,606,060 new ordinary shares with a par value of 2p as part of a fundraising which raised 
£97.4m net of expenses. In March 2014, the Group issued 39,150,484 shares to the shareholders of Fusion IP plc in exchange for 
the remaining 79.9% equity stake in the company. In March 2014, the Group issued 4,508,994 new ordinary shares with a par value 
of 2p in order to settle the 2011 LTIP scheme which partially achieved its vesting conditions and consequently became payable to 
the Group’s employees. The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry equal voting rights, equal rights to income and 
distributions of assets on liquidation, or otherwise, and no right to fixed income.

20. Operating Lease Arrangements

Payments under operating leases recognised in the statement of comprehensive income for the year

2014
£m

0.4

2013
£m

0.4

At the reporting date, the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating 
leases, which fall due as follows:

Within one year

In the second to fifth years inclusive

2014
£m

0.3

0.3

0.6

2013
£m

0.3

0.6

0.9

Operating lease payments represent rentals and other charges payable by the Group for its office properties. Leases are negotiated for 
an average term of five years and rentals are fixed for an average of one year.

21. Share-Based Payments
Annual Incentive Scheme (“AIS”)
In 2014, the Group continued to incentivise employees through its Long-Term Incentive Plan and Annual Incentive Schemes. The 
AIS awards include an element of IP Group shares, which are subject to further time-based vesting over two years (typically 50% after 
year one and 50% after year two). As at 31 December 2014, the 2013 AIS options or shares had been granted and are expected to 
vest in 2015 and 2016. However, as the number shares to be granted are based as a percentage of employees’ salary, the share-based 
payments line includes the associated expense incurred in 2014. No associated expense has been incurred for the 2014 AIS as the 
financial performance targets were not achieved. 

Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards 
Awards under the LTIP take the form of conditional awards of ordinary shares of 2p each in the Group which vest over the prescribed 
performance period to the extent that performance conditions have been met. The Remuneration Committee imposes objective 
conditions on the vesting of awards and these take into consideration the guidance of the Group’s institutional investors from time to 
time. Further information on the Group’s LTIP is set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 74.

108

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesFor reasons detailed in the Directors Remuneration Report, the 2013 and 2014 LTIP awards were both made in 2014. The awards will 
respectively ordinarily vest on 31 March 2016 and 31 March 2017, to the extent that the performance conditions have been met. The 
awards are based on the performance of the Group’s Hard NAV and Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”). Both performance measures 
are combined into a matrix format to most appropriately measure performance relative to the business, as shown in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on page 67. The total award is subject to an underpin based on the relative performance of the Group’s TSR 
to that of the FTSE250 index, which can reduce the awards by up to 50%. The 2014 LTIP matrix is designed such that up to 100% 
of the award (prior to the application of the underpin) will vest in full in the event of both Hard NAV increasing by 15% per year on a 
cumulative basis, from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2016 (2013 LTIP: 1 January 2013 to 31 December 2015), and TSR increasing by 
15% per year on a cumulative basis from the date of award to 31 March 2017 (2013 LTIP: to 31 March 2016), using an industry-standard 
average price period at the beginning and end of the performance period. Further, the matrix is designed such that 30% of the award 
shall vest (again prior to the application of the underpin) if the cumulative increase is 8% per annum for both measures over their 
respective performance periods (“threshold performance”). A straight-line sliding scale is applied for performance between the distinct 
points on the matrix of vesting targets.

No LTIP awards were made in 2013. 

The 2012 LTIP awards will ordinarily vest on 31 March 2015 to the extent that the performance conditions have been met. The awards 
are based on the performance of Group’s Hard NAV and TSR. Both performance measures are combined into a matrix format to most 
appropriately measure performance relative to the business, as shown in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 66. The total 
award is subject to an underpin based on the relative performance of the Group’s TSR to that of the FTSE Small Cap index, which can 
reduce the awards by up to 50%. The matrix is designed such that up to 100% of the award (prior to the application of the underpin) 
will vest in full in the event of both Hard NAV increasing by 15% per year on a cumulative basis, from 1 January 2012 to 31 December 
2014, and TSR increasing by 15% per year on a cumulative basis from the date of award to 31 March 2015, using an industry-standard 
average price period at the beginning and end of the performance period. Further, the matrix is designed such that 30% of the award 
shall vest (again prior to the application of the underpin) if the cumulative increase is 8% per annum for both measures over their 
respective performance periods (“threshold performance”). A straight-line sliding scale is applied for performance between the distinct 
points on the matrix of vesting targets.

The 2011 LTIP awards vested on 31 March 2014 and thereafter shares in IP Group were issued via the Group’s employee benefit trust 
to the relevant members of the Group’s staff accordingly. The table below sets out the performance measures relating to the 2011 
LTIP awards and the actual performance achieved.

Performance condition

Hard NAV 
(at 31 Dec 2013)

Annual TSR1 
(share price)

Comparative TSR1

Target 
performance

Actual/forecast 
performance

8%: £236.7m
 15%: £285.8m

£315.5m 
(18.8% p.a. growth)

8%: 63.0p 
15%: 76.0p

194.0p 
(73% p.a. growth)

FTSE Small cap 
+72%

IP Group
 +288%

1.  Annual and comparative TSR for IP Group subject to a three month average at the start and end of period, start adjusted upwards to 50p to reflect price of Group’s 2011 placing.

As the performance measures were achieved in full and the underpin was exceeded, 100% of the 2011 LTIP awards vested on  
31 March 2014. 

The movement in the number of shares notionally awarded under the LTIP is set out below: 

At 1 January

Forfeited during the year

Vested during the year

Notionally awarded during the year

Notionally awarded during the year – as part of the Fusion IP acquisition

At 31 December

2014

2013

6,163,436

18,000,923

(144,129)

(2,342,292)

(4,508,994)

(9,495,195)

2,140,180

1,338,000

—

—

4,988,493

6,163,436

109

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

21. Share-Based Payments continued
The fair value of shares notionally awarded during 2014 were calculated using Monte Carlo pricing models with the following key 
assumptions:

Share price at date of award

Exercise price

Fair value at grant date

Expected volatility (median of historical 50-day moving average)

Expected life (years)

Expected dividend yield

Risk-free interest rate

2014

£1.775

£nil

£0.52

32%

2.83

0%

1.0%

2013

£1.775

£nil

£0.85

32%

1.83

0%

1.0%

The fair value charge recognised in the statement of comprehensive income during the year in respect of share awards was £0.9m 
(2013: £0.9m).

22. Limited and Limited Liability Partnership Interests

At 1 January 2013

Additions during the year

Realisations in the year

Change in fair value during the year

At 1 January 2014

Additions during the year

Realisations in the year

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2014

£m

4.0

0.2

(0.2)

0.8

4.8

0.4

(1.1)

0.5

4.6

The Group considers interests in limited and limited liability partnerships to be Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy throughout the 
current and previous financial years. If the assumptions used in the valuation techniques for the Group’s holding in each company 
are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material difference to the carrying value of the respective spin-out 
company. The effect on the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the period is also not expected to be material.

110

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group Notes23. Related Party Transactions
The Group has various related parties arising from its key management, subsidiaries, equity stakes in portfolio companies and 
management of certain limited partnership funds.

a) Limited partnerships
The Group manages a number of investment funds structured as limited partnerships. Group entities have a limited partnership 
interest (see note 1) and act as the general partners of these limited partnerships. The Group therefore has power to exert significant 
influence over these limited partnerships. The following amounts have been included in respect of these limited partnerships:

Statement of comprehensive income

Revenue from services

Statement of financial position

Investment in limited partnerships

Amounts due from related parties

b) Key management transactions
Key management had investments in the following spin-out companies as at 31 December 2014:

2014
£m

1.3

2014
£m

3.2

—

Director

Company name

Alan Aubrey

Amaethon Limited — A Shares

Amaethon Limited — B Shares

Amaethon Limited — Ordinary shares

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Cloud Sustainability Limited1

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Evocutis plc

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Ilika plc

Karus Therapeutics Limited

Mode Diagnostics Limited – Ordinary shares

Mode Diagnostics Limited – A shares

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Oxtox Limited

Plexus Planning Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revolymer plc

Salunda Limited

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Tracsis plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Technology Group plc

1.  Cloud Sustainability Limited was formerly known as Revise Limited.

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January 
2014 

Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at 
31 December 
2014

104 

11,966 

21 

20,276,113 

11,631 

26 

19

1,447 

15 

767,310 

15,000 

108,350 

117,500 

223 

3,226 

—

1,185,150 

519,269 

2,172,809 

114,420 

25,363 

1,732 

37,160 

88,890 

53,639 

212 

393 

30 

2,389,259 

121,189 

21,518 

40,166 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(48,210)

—

—

229

—

—

—

1,246

—

—

—

—

—

—

60

—

—

—

(21,518)

—

104 

11,966 

21 

20,276,113

11,631 

26 

19

1,447 

15 

767,310 

15,000 

108,350 

69,290 

223 

3,226 

229

1,185,150 

519,269 

2,172,809 

115,666 

25,363 

1,732 

37,160 

88,890 

53,639 

212 

453 

30 

2,389,259 

121,189 

— 

40,166 

2013
£m

1.3

2013
£m

3.6

—

%

3.1%

1.0%

0.3%

0.4%

0.8%

0.4%

0.5%

0.1%

0.9%

0.1%

<0.1%

0.8%

0.2%

0.1%

0.4%

0.5%

1.7%

0.7%

1.1%

0.5%

0.1%

0.6%

<0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

1.0%

0.2%

1.3%

0.4%

0.5%

0.0%

<0.1%

111

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

23. Related Party Transactions continued

Director

Company name

Mike Townend

Amaethon Limited — A Shares

Amaethon Limited — B Shares

Amaethon Limited — Ordinary shares

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Cloud Sustainability Limited1

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Ilika plc

Mode Diagnostics Limited

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Limited

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Oxtox Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revolymer plc

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Synairgen plc

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Tracsis plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Technology Group plc

Greg Smith

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Cloud Sustainability Limited1

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Encos Limited

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Mode Diagnostics Limited – Ordinary shares

Mode Diagnostics Limited – A shares

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revolymer plc

Summit Therapeutics plc2

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Technology Group plc

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January 
2014 

Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at 
31 December 
2014

104 

11,966 

21 

931,367

11,282 

23 

18

1,286 

14 

20,000

113,222 

10,000

1,756 

1,185,150 

575,000 

932,994 

—

34,900 

25,363 

37,160 

35,940 

212 

350 

28 

20,000

1,950,862 

25,430 

5,000

35,499 

390,407 

896 

3 

6

149 

4 

5,671 

8,000 

4,830 

361 

—

313,425 

7,250 

1,500 

61,340 

4,500 

798

76 

9 

175,358 

2,559 

5,499 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

5,000

380

—

—

—

—

54

—

—

—

—

(5,000)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

28

—

—

—

—

—

— 

12

—

—

—

—

104 

11,966 

21 

931,367 

11,282 

23 

18

1,286 

14 

20,000 

113,222 

10,000 

1,756 

1,185,150 

575,000 

932,994 

5,000

35,280 

25,363 

37,160 

35,940 

212 

404 

28 

20,000 

1,950,862 

25,430 

— 

35,499 

390,407 

896 

3 

6

149 

4 

5,671 

8,000 

4,830 

361 

28

313,425 

7,250 

1,500 

61,340 

4,500 

798 

88 

9 

175,358 

2,559 

5,499 

%

3.1%

1.0%

0.3%

<0.1%

0.8%

0.3%

0.5%

0.1%

0.8%

<0.1%

0.8%

<0.1%

0.2%

1.7%

0.7%

0.5%

0.2%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

1.0%

0.2%

1.2%

<0.1%

0.3%

<0.1%

0.0%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

0.2%

0.3%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.6%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.4%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

1.  Cloud Sustainability Limited was formerly known as Revise Limited.

2.  Summit Therapeutics plc was formerly known as Summit Corporation plc and completed a 20:1 share consolidation in 2014. Share numbers shown are post-consolidation.

112

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesDirector

Company name

David Baynes

Diurnal Limited

Bruce Smith

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Evocutis plc

Getech Group plc

iQur Limited

Synairgen plc

Velocys plc

Angela Leach

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Cloud Sustainability Limited1

Evocutis plc

Getech Group plc

Mode Diagnostics Limited - Ordinary Shares

Mode Diagnostics Limited - A Shares

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revolymer plc

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Xeros Technology Group plc

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January 
2014 

Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at 
31 December 
2014

82

20,724 

15,241 

15,000 

2,000 

200,000 

10,000 

74,152 

1,858 

3 

6

7,990 

2,083 

606 

 — 

29,800 

68,101 

1,500 

25,903 

4,500

21 

78 

9

329,172 

5,666 

36

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

102 

—

—

16 

—

—

—

12 

—

—

—

118

20,724 

15,241 

15,000 

2,000 

200,000 

10,000 

74,152 

1,858 

3 

6 

7,990 

2,083 

606 

102 

29,800 

68,101 

1,516 

25,903 

4,500 

21 

90 

9 

329,172 

5,666 

%

0.2%

1.4%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.8%

0.3%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

0.4%

<0.1%

<0.1%

1.  Cloud Sustainability Limited was formerly known as Revise Limited

Compensation to key management comprises that paid to Executive and Non-executive Directors of the Group. Full details of 
Directors’ compensation are disclosed in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 74 and these amounts are included 
within the employee costs set out in note 8.

c) Portfolio companies
The Group earns fees from the provision of business support services and corporate finance advisory to portfolio companies in which 
the Group has an equity stake. The following amounts have been included in respect of these fees:

Statement of comprehensive income

Revenue from services

Statement of financial position

Trade receivables

2014
£m

0.9

2014
£m

0.6

2013
£m

0.7

2013
£m

0.3

d) Subsidiary companies
Subsidiary companies that are not 100% owned either directly or indirectly by the parent company have intercompany balances with 
other Group companies totalling as follows:

Statement of financial position

Intercompany balances with other Group companies

2014
£m

8.5

2013
£m

7.8

These intercompany balances represent funding loans provided by Group companies that are interest free, repayable on demand and 
unsecured.

113

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

23. Related Party Transactions continued 
e) 2014 capital raising and acquisition of Fusion IP plc
In February 2014, the Group completed a firm placing and placing, open offer and offer for subscription to raise gross proceeds of 
£100m (the “Fund Raise”) and in March 2014 completed the acquisition, by way of a scheme of arrangement, of Fusion IP plc  
(the “Acquisition”). In accordance with Listing Rule 11.1.10(2)(c) the following related party transactions occurred as part of the Fund Raise 
and Acquisition:

 ■ Invesco Perpetual, Lansdowne Partners Limited and Baillie Gifford & Co., all of whom each held in excess of 10% of the Group’s 

issued share capital at the time, subscribed for £14.2m, £5.0m and £10.5m respectively in the Fund Raise.

 ■ Lansdowne Partners Limited and Invesco Perpetual received 8,094,900 and 6,243,656 new consideration shares respectively as a 

result of the completion of the Acquisition.

24. Capital Management
The Group’s key objective when managing capital is to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can 
continue to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders.

The Group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk. The Group manages the capital structure, and makes adjustments to it, in 
light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of its underlying assets. In order to maintain or adjust the capital 
structure, the Group may adjust the amount of issue new shares or dispose of interests in more mature portfolio companies.

During 2014, the Group’s strategy, which was unchanged from 2013, was to maintain healthy cash and short-term deposit balances 
that enable it to provide capital to all portfolio companies, as determined by the Group’s investment committee, whilst having 
sufficient cash reserves to meet all working capital requirements in the foreseeable future.

25. Capital Commitments
Commitments to university partnerships
A number of the Group’s partnerships with research intensive universities in the UK include certain arrangements to provide seed 
capital to spin-out companies arising from such universities. As at 31 December 2014, the balances were as follows:

Partnership

University of Southampton(i)

King’s College London(ii)

University of York – CNAP(iii)

University of Leeds(iv)

University of Bristol(v)

University of Surrey(vi)

University of York(iii)

Queen Mary University of London(vii)

University of Bath(viii)

University of Glasgow(ix)

University of Manchester(x)

Year of 
commencement 
of partnership

Original 
commitment 
£m

Invested
 to date 
£m

Remaining 
commitment 
£m

2002

2003

2003

2005

2005

2006

2006

2006

2006

2006

2013

5.0

5.0

0.8

4.2

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

7.5

3.6

1.8

0.2

0.7

1.1

0.5

0.1

0.7

0.2

1.2

0.1

1.4

3.2

0.6

3.5

3.9

4.5

4.9

4.3

4.8

3.8

7.4

52.5

10.2

42.3

(i)  Under the terms of an agreement entered into in 2002 between the Group, the University of Southampton and certain of the University of Southampton’s subsidiaries, IP2IPO 

Limited agreed to make £5.0m available for the purposes of making investments in University of Southampton spin-out companies. 

(ii)  Under the terms of an agreement entered into during 2003 between the Group and King’s College London (“KCL”) and King’s College London Business Limited (formerly KCL 
Enterprises Limited), the Group agreed to make £5.0m available for the purposes of making investments in spin-out companies. Under the terms of this agreement, KCL was 
previously able to require the Company to make a further £5.0m available for investments in spin-out companies on the tenth anniversary of the partnership. However, the 
2003 agreement was terminated and replaced by a revised agreement between the same parties on 12 November 2010. Under the revised agreement, the Group has agreed 
to target investing the remaining commitment of £3.2m over a three-year period; KCL cannot, however, require the Group to make any additional funds available. Other 
changes effected by the revised agreement included the removal of the Group’s automatic entitlement to initial partner equity in every spin-out company and/or a share of 
KCL’s licensing fees from intellectual property commercialisation and to the termination rights of the parties.

(iii) 

In 2003, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of York. The agreement relates to a specialist research centre within the University of York, the Centre 
for Novel Agricultural Products (“CNAP”). The Group has committed to invest up to a total of £0.8m in spin-out companies based on CNAP’s intellectual property. In 2006, 
the Group extended its partnership with the University of York to cover the entire university. The Group has committed to invest £5.0m in University of York spin-outs over 
and beyond the £0.8m commitment as part of the Group’s agreement with CNAP. The agreement with the University of York was amended during 2013 so as to alter the 
process by which the Group evaluates commercialisation opportunities and the level of initial partner equity the Group is entitled to as a result. Further, the Group’s automatic 
entitlement to share in any of the University of York’s proceeds from out-licensing has been removed from the agreement.

(iv)  The Group extended its partnership with the University of Leeds in July 2005 by securing the right with associated contractual commitment to invest up to £5.0m in University 

of Leeds spin-out companies. This agreement was varied in March 2011 to, amongst other things, remove the Group’s entitlement to a share of out-licensing income 
generated by the University of Leeds except in certain specific circumstances where the Group is involved in the relevant out-licensing opportunity. Under the terms of the 
variation agreement, subject to quality and quantity of the investment opportunities, the Group, Techtran Group Limited and the University of Leeds have agreed to target 
annual investments of at least £0.7m in aggregate and, subject to earlier termination or the parties otherwise agreeing alternative target, to review this target on 30 April 2017. 

114

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group Notes(v) 

In December 2005, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Bristol. The Group has committed to invest up to a total of £5.0m in University of Bristol  
spin-out companies. 

(vi)  Under the terms of an agreement entered into in 2006 between the Group and the University of Surrey, the Group has committed to invest up to a total of £5.0m in spin-out 

companies based on the University of Surrey’s intellectual property. 

(vii) 

In July 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with Queen Mary University of London (“QM”) to invest in QM spin-out companies. The Group has committed to invest 
up to a total of £5.0m in QM spin-out companies. The agreement was amended in January 2014, primarily to remove the Group’s entitlement to licence fees save where it 
is involved in the development or licensing of the relevant IP and, in most cases, to replace the Group’s automatic entitlement to a share of the initial equity in any spin-out 
company with an equivalent warrant exercisable at the seed stage of the relevant company.

(viii)  In September 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Bath to invest in University of Bath spin-out companies. The Group has committed to invest 

up to a total of £5.0m in University of Bath spin-out companies. The agreement with the University of Bath was amended during 2009 so as to remove the Group’s automatic 
entitlement to a share of the initial equity or licence fees (as applicable) received by the University of Bath from the commercialisation of its intellectual property in the event 
that the Group and its employees have not been actively involved in developing the relevant opportunity.

(ix) 

(x) 

In October 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Glasgow to invest in University of Glasgow spin-out companies. The Group has committed to 
invest up to a total of £5.0m in University of Glasgow spin-out companies. 

In February 2013, the Group entered into a commercialisation agreement with the University of Manchester. Initially the Group had agreed to make available an initial facility of 
up to £5.0m to provide capital to new proof of principle projects (excluding graphene projects) intended for commercialisation through spin-out companies. During January 
2014, the Group extended its agreement to include funding for graphene projects; increased the capital commitment by a further £2.5m, bringing the total to £7.5m; and 
extended the agreement to 2019.

Commitments to limited partnerships
Pursuant to the terms of their limited partnership agreements, the Group has committed to invest the following amounts into limited 
partnerships as at 31 December 2014:

Partnership

IP Venture Fund

IP Venture Fund II L.P.

Year of 
commencement 
of partnership

Original 
commitment 
£m

Invested
 to date 
£m

Remaining 
commitment 
£m

2006

2013

3.1

10.0

13.1

3.0

1.7

4.7

0.1

8.3

8.4

26. Acquisition of subsidiaries
Acquisition of Fusion IP plc
In 2009, the Group subscribed for a 20.1% stake in Fusion IP plc (“Fusion IP”), a similar intellectual property commercialisation firm, and 
entered into an agreement with Fusion IP under which it acquired co-investment rights in all future Fusion IP portfolio companies. On 
20 March 2014, the Group acquired the remaining 79.9% equity stake in Fusion IP, in exchange for 39,150,484 shares in IP Group plc. 
The acquisition has been accounted for using the acquisition method. The consolidated financial statements for the year ending  
31 December 2014 include the results of Fusion IP for the nine-month period from the acquisition date.

Fair value of net 
assets/(liabilities) 
£m

Net assets acquired:

Acquired intangible assets

Investment portfolio

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other payables less than one year

Trade and other payables more than one year

Net assets

Less: fair value of 20.1% interest previously held(i)

Share of net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration

Consideration satisfied by:

Issue of share capital (39,150,484 shares at 209 pence(ii))

21.4

24.9

1.1

17.6

(1.1)

(0.3) 

63.6

(20.5)

43.1

38.7

81.8

81.8

(i) 

In the period from 1 January 2014 to the date of acquisition, the fair value of the Group’s existing stake in Fusion IP increased in value by £6.0m and is recognised in the 
change in fair value of equity and debt investments in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

(ii)  Being the closing price of IP Group plc shares on 20 March 2014, the date of acquisition.

From the date of acquisition, Fusion IP has contributed £2.6m of gains through the acquired portfolio companies to the fair value 
gains, £0.2m to revenue from services and other income, and £2.7m in expenses for the year. If the acquisition had occurred on  
1 January 2014, the acquisition would have contributed £3.0m to fair value gains, £0.4m to revenue from services and other income, 
and £3.4m expense for the period.

115

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
Continued

26. Acquisition of subsidiaries continued 
The Group incurred acquisition costs of £1.1m relating to, amongst other items, broker’s fees, legal costs and due diligence costs. 
These costs are reflected separately on the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

The balances noted above for trade and other receivables, as well as trade and other payables less than one year, represent the fair 
value of the receivables at the date of acquisition and are not materially different from the carrying values held by Fusion IP prior to 
acquisition. The fair value of the acquired trade and other receivables is equivalent to the gross contractual amounts receivable, being 
the best estimate at the acquisition date of the contractual cash flows expected to be collected. 

Prior to acquisition, Fusion IP recognised an additional £1.5m in trade and other payables due over more than one year relating to 
balances owed to university partners on the basis of the values of associated spin-out companies. On applying the Group’s valuation 
policies (as described in note 1) to these spin-outs, a number were impaired and, correspondingly, the fair value of the associated 
liability has been adjusted to reflect these fair value changes. The remaining balances owed to Fusion IP’s university partners are 
contingent upon both timing and value of the realisation of the associated spin-outs.

At the date of its acquisition by the Group, Fusion IP had contractual arrangements and memorandums of understanding with four UK 
universities. At the date of acquisition of Fusion IP, the acquired intangible assets were valued at £21.4m. The fair value of the acquired 
intangible assets was calculated on an indexed cost basis as there is a limited number of such arrangements with universities and 
there is no active market. As the contractual agreements are for a finite term, the intangible assets will be subsequently measured at 
amortised cost. Amortisation will occur over the remaining term, or useful life, of each contractual arrangement. Both the acquired 
intangible assets and the associated cost of amortisation are shown in individual lines on the consolidated statement of financial 
position and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income respectively.

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of Fusion IP primarily relates to the expertise, knowledge and processes concerning successful 
commercialisation of intellectual properties through early investment and development gained by the Group. The goodwill forms part 
of the university partnership CGU. None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Further detail on goodwill can 
be found in note 11.

27. Post Balance Sheet Events
On 10 March 2015, the Group announced a proposed firm placing, placing and open offer to raise gross proceeds of £128m. 

116

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014Our Financials Group NotesCompany balance sheet
As at 31 December 2014

ASSETS

Fixed assets

Investment in subsidiary undertakings

Investment in associated undertakings

Other investments

Loans to subsidiary undertakings

Trade and other receivables

Total assets

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Profit and loss reserve

Total equity shareholders’ funds and liabilities

Registered number: 4204490

Our Financials Company Statements

Note

2014
£m

2013
£m

2

3

4

5

6

6

6

127.6

3.7

0.6

216.5

0.1

348.5

9.6

327.6

12.8

(1.5)

348.5

25.3

10.5

0.5

120.4

—

156.7

7.5

150.4

12.8

(14.0)

156.7

The financial statements on pages 117 to 120 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 9 March 2015 and 
were signed on its behalf by:

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

117

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comNotes to the financial statements 
continued

1. Accounting Policies
The financial statements of the parent company have been prepared under the historical cost convention, in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006 and applicable United Kingdom accounting standards. A summary of the more important accounting policies 
which have been applied consistently throughout the year are set out below.

Investments 
Investments are stated at historic cost less any provision for impairment in value and are held for long-term investment purposes.

Provisions are based upon an assessment of events or changes in circumstances that indicate that an impairment has occurred 
such as the performance and/or prospects (including the financial prospects) of the investee company being significantly below 
the expectations on which the investment was based, a significant adverse change in the markets in which the investee company 
operates or a deterioration in general market conditions.

Intercompany loans
All intercompany loans are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost. Where intercompany loans 
are intended for use on a continuing basis in the Company’s activities, and there is no intention of their settlement in the foreseeable 
future, they are presented as fixed assets.

Impairment
If there is an indication that an asset might be impaired, the Company will perform an impairment review. An asset is impaired if 
the recoverable amount, being the higher of net realisable value and value in use, is less than its carrying amount. Value in use is 
measured based on future discounted cash flows (“DCF”) attributable to the asset. In such cases, the carrying value of the asset is 
reduced to recoverable amount with a corresponding charge recognised in the profit and loss account.

Financial instruments
Currently the Company does not enter into derivative financial instruments. Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised and 
cease to be recognised on the basis of when the related titles pass to or from the Company. 

2. Investments in Subsidiary Undertakings 

At 1 January 2014

Additions

Impairment

Disposals

At 31 December 2014

Details of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings at 31 December 2014 are as follows:

£m

25.3

102.3

—

—

127.6

Name of subsidiary

IP2IPO Limited

IP2IPO Management Limited1

IP2IPO Management II Limited1

IP2IPO Management III Limited1,2

IP2IPO Management IV Limited1

IP2IPO Management V Limited1,2

IP2IPO Management VI Limited1

IP2IPO Management VII Limited1

IP2IPO Management VIII Limited1

IP2IPO Americas Limited

IP2IPO (Europe) Limited1

IP2IPO Guarantee Limited1,5

IP Group Inc.1 

Top Technology Ventures Limited3

Top Technology Ventures IV GP Ltd1,3

Fusion IP plc6

Fusion IP Sheffield Limited6

Place of incorporation 
(or registration) 
and operation

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

Delaware, USA

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

Proportion 
of ownership 
interest 
%

Proportion
 of voting 
power held 
%

Method used 
to account for 
investment

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S
y
n
a
p
m
o
C
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

118

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Our Financials Company Statements

Place of incorporation 
(or registration) 
and operation

Proportion 
of ownership 
interest 
%

Proportion
 of voting 
power held 
%

Method used 
to account for 
investment

England and Wales

England and Wales

Scotland

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

61.1

61.1

61.1

61.1

61.1

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

80.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

67.5

60.0

60.0

60.0

51.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

60.0

60.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

72.6

72.6

72.6

72.6

72.6

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

80.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

67.5

60.0

60.0

60.0

51.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

60.0

60.0

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Name of subsidiary

Fusion IP Cardiff Limited6

IP Venture Fund GP Limited1,3

IP Ventures (Scotland) Limited1,3

North East Technology (GP) Limited1,3

Techtran Group Limited

Techtran Investments Limited1,2

Techtran Services Limited1,2

Techtran Corporate Finance Limited1,2

Techtran Limited1,2

Modern Biosciences plc4

PIMCO 2664 Limited1,4

Modern Biosciences Nominees Limited1,2

MBS Secretarial Limited1,2

MBS Director Limited1,2

IP2IPO Nominees Limited2

IP2IPO Services Limited2

LifeUK (IP2IPO) Limited2

IP Industry Partners Limited2

Union Life Sciences Limited

Biofusion Licensing (Sheffield) Limited2,6

Fusion IP Nottingham Limited6

Fusion IP Two Limited6

Manelum Limited2,6

Resagen Limited6

Rhemotric Microsystems Limited6

Asterion Limited6

BioHydrogen Limited2,6

Medella Therapeutics Limited Limited6

PH Therapeutics Limited6

Lifestyle Choices Limited2,6

Rhedyn Limited6

Wound Genetics Limited6

Wound Genetics Prognostics Limited6

Wound Genetics Therapeutics Limited6

Extraject Technologies Limited6

Proflu Limited6

1.  Company held indirectly.

2.  Dormant company.

3.  Company engaged in fund management activity.

4.  Company engaged in in-licensing of drugable intellectual property activity.

5.  Company limited by guarantee.

6.  Acquired as part of the Fusion IP plc acquisition.

All companies above are incorporated in England with the exception of IP Ventures (Scotland) Limited which is incorporated in 
Scotland and IP Group Inc. which is incorporated in Delaware, USA. All companies above undertake the activity of commercialising 
intellectual property unless stated otherwise. 

119

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comNotes to the financial statements 
continued

3. Investment In Associated Undertakings

At 1 January 2014

Additions

Impairment

Disposals

At 31 December 2014

£m

10.5

—

—

(6.8)

3.7

At 31 December 2014, the Company has investments where it holds 20% or more of the issued ordinary share capital of the following 
companies:

Undertaking

Modern Water plc

% of 
issued share 
capital held

Net assets 
£000

Profit/(loss) 
before tax 
£000

Date of financial 
statements

20.0%

30,356

(4,766)

31 December 2013

During 2014, the remaining 79.9% equity stake in Fusion IP plc was acquired. The results of this company are now consolidated with 
the Group and therefore it is no longer presented as an associated undertaking. 

All companies are incorporated in England and Wales. 

4. Other Investments

At 1 January 2014

Additions

Impairment

Disposals

At 31 December 2014

5. Loans to Subsidiary Undertakings

At 1 January 2014

Additions during the year

Repayment during the year

At 31 December 2014

£m

0.5

0.1

—

—

0.6

£m

120.4

96.0

0.1

216.5

The amounts due from subsidiary undertakings are interest free, repayable on demand and unsecured. 

6. Share Capital and Reserves

At 1 January 2014

Profit for the year

Issue of equity

At 31 December 2014

Share 
capital
£m

Share 
premium 
£m

Merger 
reserve
£m

Profit and 
loss reserve
£m

7.5

—

2.1

9.6

150.4

—

177.2

327.6

12.8

—

—

12.8

(14.0)

12.5

—

(1.5)

Details of the Company’s authorised share capital and changes in its issued share capital can be found in note 19 to the consolidated 
financial statements. Details of the movement in the share premium account can be found in the consolidated statement of changes 
in equity.

7. Profit and Loss Account
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s profit and loss account has not been included in these 
financial statements. The Company’s profit for the year was £12.5m (2013: £0.1m loss).

Details of auditor’s remuneration are disclosed in note 6 to the consolidated financial statements.

8. Directors’ Emoluments, Employee Information and Share-Based Payments
The remuneration of the Directors is borne by Group subsidiary undertakings. Full details of their remuneration can be found in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 74. Full details of the share-based payments charge and related disclosures can be 
found in note 21 to the consolidated financial statements.

The Company had no employees during 2014 or 2013. 

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S
y
n
a
p
m
o
C
s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

i

120

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2014 
 
 
Company information

Company registration number

4204490

Registered office

24 Cornhill
London
EC3V 3ND

Directors

Dr Bruce Gordon Smith CBE (Non-executive Chairman)

Alan John Aubrey (Chief Executive Officer)

Michael Charles Nettleton Townend (Chief Investment Officer)

Gregory Simon Smith (Chief Financial Officer)

David Baynes (Chief Operating Officer)

Mike Humphrey (Senior Independent Director)

Jonathan Brooks (Non-executive Director)

Douglas Brian Liversidge CBE (Non-executive Director) 

Professor Lynn Gladden CBE (Non-executive Director)

Company secretary

Angela Leach

Brokers

Registrars

Bankers

Solicitors

Independent auditor

Numis Securities Limited
The London Stock Exchange
10 Paternoster Square 
London
EC4M 7LT

Capita Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent BR3 4TU

Royal Bank of Scotland
PO Box 333
Silbury House
300 Silbury Boulevard
Milton Keynes 
MK9 2ZF

Pinsent Masons
CityPoint
One Ropemaker Street
London 
EC2Y 9AH

KPMG LLP
15 Canada Square
London
E14 5GL

Printed on Cocoon Silk 100.
A recycled paper containing 100% recycled waste and manufactured  
at a mill certified with ISO 14001 environmental management standard.
Fully recyclable and biodegradable.
The pulp used in this product is bleached using an Elemental Chlorine 
Free process. (ECF)

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015I

P

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

4

S

t

o

c

k

C

o

d

e

:

I

P

O

Create
Develop
Deliver

IP Group plc
24 Cornhill
London
EC3V 3ND

T +44 (0)845 074 2929
F +44 (0)845 074 2928

www.ipgroupplc.com

23830.04   Proof 7   1-04-2015